LENZE Manuals 720

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 187

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDB9300UES
00414796

Operating Instructions

Global Drive
9300 servo
Show/Hide Bookmarks

These Operating Instructions are valid for the 93XX controllers of the versions:

33.932X- ES 2x. 2x (9321 - 9329)


33.933X- ES 2x. 2x (9330 - 9332)
33.932X- CS 2x. 2x -V003 Cold Plate (9321 - 9328)

Controller type

Design:
Ex = Built-in unit IP20
Cx = Cold Plate
xK = Cam profiler
xP = Positioning controller
xR = Register controller
xS = Servo inverter

Hardware version and index

Software level and index

Variant

Explanation

. 2000 Lenze GmbH & Co KG


No part of this documentation may be reproduced or made accessible to third parties without written consent by Lenze GmbH & Co KG.
We have thoroughly collected all specifications in this documentation and have checked it for compliance with the described hardware and software. Howe-
ver, differences cannot be excluded completely. We are not responsible or liable for possible consequential damage. We will include necessary corrections
in subsequent editions.

Version 2.1 10/00


Show/Hide Bookmarks

S c r e e n p la te m a in s c o n n e c tio n
M a in s c o n n e c tio n
L 1 L 2 L 3 + U G -U G a n d D C c o n n e c tio n

P E
R D Y IM P Im a x M m a x F a il

D e ta c h a b le o p e r a tin g m o d u le
1 2 5 0 rp m a lte r n a tiv
F ie ld b u
e ly
s e s
M C T R L - N - A C T
IN T E R B U S

X 1 (h id d e n ):
X 1 A u to m a tio n in te r fa c e

H I
S y s te m b u s (C A N )
X 4

L O G N D
3 9 E 5 E 4 E 3 E 2 E 1 2 8

5 9 S T2 S T 1 A 4 A 3 A 2 A 1

X 5

C o n tr o l te r m in a ls
3
1

X 6
4
2

6 3 7
6 2 7

1
R e s o lv e r in p u t
X 7
5

X 8 E n c o d e r in p u t
1

5
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y in p u t
X 9 1

S c r e e n c o n n e c tio n

X 1 0 D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y o u tp u t
5

P T C
S c r e e n p la te c o n tr o l c o n n e c tio n s
P E
T 1 T 2
P T C c o n n e c tio n
U V W
M o to r c o n n e c tio n

S c r e e n p la te m o to r c a b le s

K35.0002
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

1 Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


1.1 About these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 What is new / what has changed ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Packing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


2.1 Safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 General data/operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.1 Types 9321 to 9325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.2 Types 9321 to 9324 with 200 % overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.3 Types 9326 to 9332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.4 Fuses and cable cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.5 Mains filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 i
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.3 Assembly with thermally separated power stage (”punching”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.4 Assembly of variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2 Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.1.1 Residual-current circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.1.2 Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1.3 Replacement of defective fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1.4 Mains disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.2 Protection of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.4 Mains types/conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.5 Interaction with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.6 Specification of all cables used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.7 Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.7.1 Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.7.2 Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.7.3 Connection of a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.7.4 DC bus connection of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.2.8 Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.8.1 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.8.2 Assignment of the control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.8.3 Connection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.9 Motor temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.2.9.1 User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.2.10 Feedback systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.3 Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Switch-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Input of the motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Operation with synchronous motors made by other manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1.1 Rotor position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Controller enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Input of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5 Quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.6 Change of the internal control structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 Change of the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1 Freely assignable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.2 Freely assignable digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.3 Freely assignable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

ii BA9300SU EN 2.1 
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

6 During operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


6.1 Status indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 In Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Information on operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Switching on the motor side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Controller protection by current derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

7 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


7.1 Ways of parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Structure of a parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 List of selection menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Parameter setting using the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.2 Change parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.2.3 Save parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2.4 Load parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.5 Parameter set transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.2.6 Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3 Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

8 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Predefined configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Working with predefined configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.3 Configuration with Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Working with function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.1 Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.2 Elements of a function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.3 Connection of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.4 Entries into the processing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4 Description of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.5 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.1 Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.2 Set reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.3 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.5.4 Fault indication via digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 iii


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


9.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Structure of the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Working with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3 Fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.4 Reset of fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.1 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Torque control with speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.2.3 Digital frequency - master - drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.2.4 Digital frequency bus - slave - drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.2.5 Digital frequency cascade - slave - drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.4 Selection lists of signal links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
11.5 Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
11.5.1 Servo motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
11.5.2 Three-phase asynchronous motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
11.6 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
11.7 Table of keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64

iv BA9300SU EN 2.1 
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1 Preface and general information

1.1 About these Operating Instructions


• The present Operating Instructions will assist you in connecting and commissioning the 93XX
servo inverter. They include safety notes which you must observe.
• All persons working on and with the controller must have the operating instructions available
and must observe the information and notes relevant for their work.
• The Operating Instructions must always be in a complete and perfectly readable state.
• Further information on the controller can be obtained from the Catalog and the Manual.

1.1.1 Terminology used


Term In the following text used for
93XX Any type of servo inverter (types 9321 ... 9332)
Controller The 93XX servo
Drive system Drive system with 93XX servos and other Lenze drive components

1.1.2 What is new / what has changed ?


Material no. Edition Important Contents
391489 01/1997 1st edition
395638 05/1997 substitues • Chapter 3.3
391489 • Chapter 4.1.2
• Chapter 6.2.2
403496 06/1998 substitues • Chapter 1 - 4 revised
395638 • Acceleration drive mode
• Oscilloscope function
414796 05/2000 substitues • Chapter 3.3.5: Mains filter
403469 • Chapter 4.2.4: Mains types/mains conditions
• Chapter 4.2.9ff: Motor temperature monitoring
• Chapter 11.3: Code list
414796 10/2000 substitues
05/2000

1.2 Packing list


Packing list Important
• 1 servo inverter type 93XX After receipt of the delivery, check immediately whether the items delivered match
• 1 book of Operating Instructions the accompanying papers. Lenze does not accept any liability for deficiencies
• 1 accessory kit (bits and pieces for mechanical and claimed subsequently.
electrical installation) Claim
• visible transport damage immediately to the forwarder.
• visible deficiencies/incompleteness immediately to your Lenze representative.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 1-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.3 Legal regulations


Identification Nameplate CE identification Manufacturer
Lenze controllers are unambiguously In compliance with the EC Low-Voltage Lenze GmbH & Co KG
designated by the contents of the nameplate. Directive Postfach 101352
D-31763 Hameln
Application as The 93XX servo
directed • must only be operated under the conditions prescribed in these Instructions.
• are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with PM synchronous motors, asynchronous servo motors or asynchronous
standard motors
– for installation in a machine
– for assembly with other components to form a machine.
• are electric units for the installation into control cabinets or similar enclosed operating housing.
• comply with the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive.
• are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.
• are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.
Drive systems with 93XX servo inverters
• comply with the EMC Directive if they are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.
• can be used
– for operation on public and non-public mains
– for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
• The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed as inappropriate!
Liability • The information, data, and notes in these instructions met the state of the art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to
controllers which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information, illustrations, and descriptions.
• The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these instructions are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific
application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit proposals.
• The specifications in these Instructions describe the product features without guaranteeing them.
• Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference caused by:
– disregarding the operating instructions
– Unauthorized modifications to the controller
– Operating errors
– improper working on and with the controller
Warranty • Warranty conditions: see Sales and Delivery Conditions of Lenze GmbH & Co KG.
• Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the deficiency or fault.
• The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
Disposal
p Material recycle dispose
Metal • -
Plastic • -
Assembled PCBs - •

1-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information

2 Safety information

2.1 Safety and application notes for Lenze controllers


(to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)

1. General 4. Installation
During operation, drive controllers may have live, bare, in some The units must be installed and cooled according to the regulations
cases also movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, given in the corresponding documentation.
depending on their level of protection. The controllers must be protected from inappropriate loads.
Non-authorized removal of the required cover, inappropriate use, Particularly during transport and handling, components must not be
incorrect installation or operation, creates the risk of severe injury to bent and/or insulation distances must not be changed. Avoid
persons or damage to material assets. touching of electronic components and contacts.
For further information see the documentation.
Controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components, which can
All operations concerning transport, installation, and commissioning easily be damaged by inappropriate handling. Electrical components
as well as maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled may not be damaged or destroyed mechanically (health risks are
personnel (IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD384 or VDE 0100 and IEC possible!) .
report 664 or VDE 0110 and national regulations for the prevention
of accidents must be observed). 5. Electrical connection
According to this basic safety information qualified skilled personnel When working on live controllers, the valid national regulations for
are persons who are familiar with the erection, assembly, the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must be observed.
commissioning, and operation of the product and who have the Carry out the electrical installation in compliance with the
qualifications necessary for their occupation. corresponding regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE
2. Application as directed connection). More detailed information is given in the corresponding
Drive controllers are components which are designed for the documentation and must be observed.
installation into electrical systems or machinery. Notes about wiring according to EMC regulations, such as shielding,
When installing in machines, commissioning of the drive controllers grounding, filters and cable routing, are included in the
(i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is prohibited until it is documentation for the controllers. These notes also apply to
proven that the machine corresponds to the regulations of the EC CE-marked controllers. The compliance with limit values required by
Directive 98/37/EEC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204 (VDE 0113) the EMC legislation is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the
must be observed. machine or system.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only allowed 6. Operation
when there is compliance with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC). Systems where drive controllers are installed must be equipped, if
The controllers meet the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive necessary, with additional monitoring and protective devices
73/23/EEC. The harmonized standards EN 50178 (VDE 0160) with EN according to the valid safety regulations, e.g. law on technical tools,
60439-1 (VDE 0660-500) and EN 60146 (VDE 0558) are applicable regulations for the prevention of accidents, etc. Modifications on the
to the controllers. controllers by means of the operating software are allowed.
The technical data as well as the connection conditions can be
After disconnection of the controllers from the supply voltage, live
obtained from the nameplate and the documentation. They must be
parts of the controller and power connections may not be touched
observed in all cases.
immediately, because of possibly charged capacitors. For this
3. Transport, storage
observe the corresponding notes on the controller.
The notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be
observed. During operation, all covers and doors must be closed.
The climatic conditions according to EN 50178 (VDE 0160) must be 7. Maintenance and service
observed. Observe the manufacturer’s documentation.

These safety notes must be kept!


The product-specific safety and application notes given in these Operating Instructions must also be observed!

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 2-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information

2.2 Layout of the safety information


• All safety information have a uniform layout:
– The icon characterizes the type of danger.
– The signal word characterizes the severity of danger.
– The note text describes the danger and gives information on how to prevent dangerous
situations.

Signal word
Note

Icons used Signal words


Warning of Warning of Danger! Warns of impending danger.
damage to hazardous electrical Consequences if disregarded:
persons voltage Death or severe injuries.

Warning of a general Warning! Warns of potential, very hazardous situations.


danger Possible consequences if disregarded:
Death or severe injuries.
Caution! Warns of potential, hazardous situations.
Possible consequences if disregarded:
Light or minor injuries.
Warning of Stop! Warns of potential damage to material.
damage to Possible consequences if disregarded:
material Damage of the controller/drive system or its environment.
Other notes Tip! This note designates general, useful notes.
If you observe it, handling of the controller/drive system is made easier.

2.3 Residual hazards


Protection of After mains voltage disconnection the power terminals U, V, W and +UG, -UG carry hazardous voltages at least 3 minutes
persons after mains disconnection.
• Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to the power terminals.
Protection of Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage at L1, L2, L3 or +UG, +UG may overload the internal
devices input current load:
• Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.
Overspeeds Drive systems can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting high field frequencies for motors and machines which are
not suitable):
• The controllers do not offer any protection against these operating conditions. Use additional components for this.
Parameter set During parameter set transfer, the control terminals of the 9300 servo can have undefined states!
transfer Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be removed before transfer. Thus it is ensured that the controller is inhibited and all
control terminals have the defined state ”LOW”.

2-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3 Technical data

3.1 Features
• Single axis in narrow design
– thus space-saving installation
• Power range: 370 W to 75 kW
– uniform control module and thus uniform connection for the control cables over the
complete power range
• Heat sink can be separated
– the cooling can be achieved outside the control cabinet
(punching or ”Cold Plate”)
• Power connections from the top (supply) or from the bottom (motor)
– simple connection for multi-axis applications
• Direct connection of resolver and encoder feedback
– simple connection via prefabricated cables (accessories)
– connecting cables can be plugged
• Integrated phase controller for driftfree standstill
• Field-oriented control for asynchronous and synchronous motors
• Vector modulation
• Digital synchronization system via digital frequency
– setpoint transmission without offset - und gain errors
– Synchronization in speed and rotor position
– Homing function
• Application configuration for control functions and input/output signals
– comprehensive function block library
– high flexibility in the adaptation of the internal control structure to the application
• Integrated automation interface
– simple extensions of the controller functions
• System bus for the connection of servo inverters and for the extension of input and output
terminals
• Approval of standard devices UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)
• Approval 9371 BB (BAE) UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 3-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.2 General data/ operating conditions


Field Values
Vibration resistance Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions
Permissible moisture Humidity class F without condensation
(average relative humidity 85 %)
Permissible temperature ranges during transport: -25 °C ... + 70 °C
during storage of the controller: -25 °C ... + 55 °C
during operation of the controller: 0 °C ... + 40 °C without derating
+ 40 °C ... + 55 °C with power derating (controllers 9321-9326)
+ 40 °C ... + 50 °C with power derating (controllers 9327-9332)
Permissible installation height h h ≤ 1000 m a.m.s.l. without derating
1000 m a.m.s.l. < h ≤ 4000 m a.m.s.l. with derating
Permissible pollution VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2
Noise emission Requirements to EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1, EN 61800-3
Limit value class A to EN 55011 (industrial area) with mains filter A
Limit value class B acc. to EN 55022 (residential area) with mains filter B and installation in control cabinet
Noise immunity Limit values maintained using mains filter.
Requirements to EN 50082-2, EN 61800-3
Requirements Standard Severity
Running time EN61000-4-2 3, i.e. 8 kV at air discharge and 6 kV at contact discharge
RF interference
(enclosure) EN61000-4-3 3, i.e. 10 V/m; 27 to 1000 MHz
Burst EN61000-4-4 3/4, i.e. 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge IEC 1000-4-5 3, i.e. 1.2/50 µs, 1 kV Phase-Phase, 2 kV Phase-PE
Insulation strength Overvoltage category III to VDE 0110
Packaging to DIN 4180
9321 to 9332: Delivery packing
Type of protection IP20
IP41 on the heat-sink side for thermal separation (punching)
NEMA 1: Protection against contact
Approvals CE: Low-Voltage Directive
UL508: Industrial Control Equipment
UL508C: Power Conversion Equipment

3-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.3 Rated data

3.3.1 Types 9321 to 9325


Type EVS9321-ES EVS9322-ES EVS9323-ES EVS9324-ES EVS9325-ES
Order No. EVS9321-ES EVS9322-ES EVS9323-ES EVS9324-ES EVS9325-ES
Type EVS9321-CS EVS9322-CS EVS9323-CS EVS9324-CS EVS9325-CS
Order No. EVS9321-CS EVS9322-CS EVS9323-CS EVS9324-CS EVS9325-CS
Mains voltage Vr [V] 320 V - 0 % ≤ Vr ≤ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Alternative DC supply VDC [V] 460 V - 0 % ≤ VDC ≤ 740 V + 0 %
Mains current with mains filter Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0 12.0
Mains current without mains filter 2.1 3.5 5.5 - 16.8
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0 5.5
Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5
Output power U, V, W (8kHz*) Sr8 [kVA] 1.0 1.7 2.7 4.8 9.0
Output power + UDC, -UDC 2) PDC [kW] 2.0 0.75 2.2 0.75 0
Output current (8 kHz*) Ir8 [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0 13.0
Output current (16 kHz*) Ir16 [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2 9.7
Max. output current (8 kHz*)1) Imax8 [A] 2.3 3.8 5.9 10.5 19.5
Max. output current (16 kHz*)1) Imax16 [A] 1.7 2.7 4.4 7.8 14.6
Max. standstill current (8 kHz*) I08 [A] 2.3 3.8 5.9 10.5 19.5
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A] 1.7 2.7 4.4 7.8 14.6
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0 5.5
Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5
Output power U, V, W (8kHz*) Sr8 [kVA] 1.2 2.1 3.2 5.8 10.8
Output power + UDC, -UDC 2) PDC [kW] 2.0 0.75 2.2 0.75 0
Output current (8 kHz*) Ir8 [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0 13.0
Output current (16 kHz*) Ir16 [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2 9.7
Max. output current (8 kHz*)1) Imax8 [A] 2.3 3.8 5.9 10.5 19.5
Max. output current (16 kHz*)1) Imax16 [A] 1.7 2.7 4.4 7.8 14.6
Max. standstill current (8 kHz*) I08 [A] 2.3 3.8 5.9 10.5 19.5
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A] 1.7 2.7 4.4 7.8 14.6
Motor voltage VM [V] 0 - 3 × VMains
Power loss (operation with Iratedx ) Ploss [W] 100 110 140 200 260
Power derating [%/K] 40 °C < TV < 55 °C: 2%/K (not UL approved)
[%/m] 1000 m amsl < h ≤ 4000 m amsl: 5%/1000m
Weight m [kg] 3.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 7.5

1) The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned
here and 2 minutes base load with 75% Iratedx
2) When operated under rated load, the controller can supply this power additionally.
* Chopper frequency of the inverter (C0018)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 3-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.3.2 Types 9321 to 9324 with 200 % overcurrent


Type EVS9321-ES EVS9322-ES EVS9323-ES EVS9324-ES
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0
Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz) S r8 [kVA] 1.0 1.7 2.7 4.8
Output current (8 kHz) 2) Ir8 [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
Output current (16 kHz) 2) Ir16 [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2
max output current (8 kHz)1) Imax8 [A] 3.0 5.0 7.8 14.0
max output current (16 kHz)1) Imax16 [A] 2.2 3.6 5.8 10.4
max. standstill current (8 kHz) I08 [A] 3.0 5.0 7.8 14.0
max. standstill current (16 kHz) I016 [A] 2.2 3.6 5.8 10.4
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0
Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz) S r8 [kVA] 1.2 2.1 3.2 5.8
Output current (8 kHz) 2) Ir8 [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
Output current (16 kHz) 2) Ir16 [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2
max output current (8 kHz)1) Imax8 [A] 3.0 5.0 7.8 14.0
max output current (16 kHz)1) Imax16 [A] 2.2 3.6 5.8 10.4
max. standstill current (8 kHz) I08 [A] 3.0 5.0 7.8 14.0
max. standstill current (16 kHz) I016 [A] 2.2 3.6 5.8 10.4

1) The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 10 seconds overcurrent with the current
mentioned here and 50 seconds base load with 44 % Irx

Majority in indiv. Setting in thermal Maximum current Recovery phase


cases code C0022 continuous current phase
Continuous power Imax ≤150 % IrX 100 % IrX 150 % IrXfor 60 s 75 % IrX for 120 s
Peak power Imax > 150 % IrX 70 % IrX 200 % IrX for 10 s 44 % IrX for 50 s

2) This output current Irx applies for a maximum current to be set under C022 which has not
exceeded 150% of the rated controller current (nameplate).
If the maximum current is higher than this value, the continuous current reduces automatically to
70% of the original value.
Overcurrent diagram: ^ 8-17
All other data: ^ 3-3

Tip!
You can switch to Imax > 150 % IrX only if the controller is inhibited.

3-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.3.3 Types 9326 to 9332


Type EVS9326-ES EVS9327-ES EVS9328-ES EVS9329-ES EVS9330-ES EVS9331-ES EVS9332-ES
Order No. EVS9326-ES EVS9327-ES EVS9328-ES EVS9329-ES EVS9330-ES EVS9331-ES EVS9332-ES
Type EVS9326-CS EVS9327-CS EVS9328-CS
Order No. EVS9326-CS EVS9327-CS EVS9328-CS
Mains voltage ar [V] 320 V - 0 % ≤ Vr ≤ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Alternative DC supply aDC [V] 460 V - 0 % ≤ UDC ≤ 740 V + 0 %
Mains current with mains filter Ir [A] 20.5 27.0 44.0 53.0 78.0 100 135
Mains current without mains filter - 43.5 - - - - -
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 11.0 15.0 22.0 30.0 45.0 55.0 75.0
Pr [hp] 15.0 20.5 30.0 40.0 60.0 73.5 100.0
Output power UVW (8 kHz*) Sr8 [kVA] 16.3 22.2 32.6 40.9 61.6 76.2 100.5
Output power + UDC, -UDC 2) PDC [kW] 0 10 4 0 5 0 0
Output current (8 kHz*) 1) Ir8 [A] 23.5 32.0 47.0 59.0 89.0 110.0 145.0
Output current (16 kHz*) 1) Ir16 [A] 15.3 20.8 30.6 38.0 58.0 70.0 90.0
Max. output current (8 kHz*) Imax8 [A] 35.3 48.0 70.5 88.5 133.5 165.0 217.5
Max. output current (16 kHz*) Imax16 [A] 23.0 31.2 45.9 57.0 87.0 105.0 135.0
Max. standstill current (8 kHz*) I08 [A] 23.5 32.0 47.0 52.0 80.0 110.0 126.0
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A] 15.3 20.8 30.6 33.0 45.0 70.0 72.0
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/60Hz
Motor power
p ((4-pole
p ASM)) Pr [kW] 11.0 18.5 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 90.0
Pr [hp] 15.0 25.0 40.0 49.5 60.0 73.5 120.0
Output power UVW (8 kHz*) Sr8 [kVA] 18.5 25.0 37.0 46.6 69.8 87.3 104.0
Output power + UDC, -UDC 2) PDC [kW] 0 12 4.8 0 6 0 6
Output current (8 kHz*) Ir8 [A] 22.3 30.4 44.7 56.0 84.0 105.0 125.0
Output current (16 kHz*) Ir16 [A] 14.5 19.2 28.2 35.0 55.0 65.0 80.0
Max. output current (8 kHz*)1) Imax8 [A] 33.5 45.6 67.1 84.0 126.0 157.5 187.5
Max. output current (16 kHz*)1) Imax16 [A] 21.8 28.8 42.3 52.5 82.5 97.5 120.0
Max. standstill current (8 kHz*) I08 [A] 22.3 30.4 44.7 49.0 72.0 105.0 111.0
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A] 14.5 19.2 28.2 25.0 36.0 58.0 58.0
Motor voltage aM [V] 0 - 3 × VMains
Power loss Ploss [W] 360 430 640 810 1100 1470 1960
Power derating [%/K] 9326: at 40 °C < Ta < 55 °C: 2%/K (not UL approved)
[%/K] 9327 - 9332: at 40 °C < Ta < 50 °C: 2.5%/K (not UL approved)
[%/m] 1000 m amsl < h ≤ 4000 m amsl: 5%/1000m
Weight m [kg] 7.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 36.5 59 59

1) The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned
here and 2 minutes base load with 75% Iratedx
2) When operated under rated load, the controller can supply this power additionally.
* Chopper frequency of the inverter (C0018)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 3-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.3.4 Fuses and cable cross-sections


Type
yp Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE/motor connection U, V, W Input + UG, -UG
Operation without mains filter Operation with mains filter
Fuse E.l.c.b. Cable cross-section Fuse E.l.c.b. Cable Fuse Cable
2) cross-section 2) cross-section 2)
VDE UL VDE mm2 AWG VDE UL VDE mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
9321 M 6A 5A B 6A 1 17 M 6A 5A B 6A 1 17 6.3A 1 17
9322 M 6A 5A B 6A 1 17 M 6A 5A B 6A 1 17 6.3A 1 17
9323 M 10A 10A B 10A 1.5 15 M 10A 10A B 10A 1.5 15 8A 1.5 15
9324 - - - - - M 10A 10A B 10A 1.5 15 12A 1.5 15
9325 M 32A 25A B 32A 6 9 M 20A 20A B 20A 4 11 20A 4 11
9326 - - - - - M 32A 25A B 32A 6 9 40A 6 9
9327 M 63A 63A - 16 6 35A 35A - 10 7 50A 10 7
9328 - - - - - 50A 50A - 16 5 80A 16 5
9329 - - - - - 80A 80A - 25 3 100A 25 3
9330 - - - - - 100A 100A - 50 0 2 * 80A 1) 2 * 16 2 *5
9331 - - - - - 125A 125 A - 70 2/0 2 * 100A 1) 2 * 25 2 *3
9332 - - - - - 160A 175 A - 95 3/0 3 * 80A 1) 3 * 16 3 *5

1) The DC bus fuses are connected in parallel


2) The valid local regulations must be observed

For operation of the controllers in a UL-approved plant:


• Use only UL-approved fuses and fuse holders:
– 500 V to 600 V in the mains input (AC)
– 700 V in DC-bus voltage (DC)
– The activation characteristic is defined by ”H” or ”K5”.
• Use only UL-approved cables.

Tip!
UL-approved fuses and fuse holders can be obtained from, e.g. Bussmann or Ferraz.

Connection of the motor cables


• The protection of the motor cables is not necessary for functional reasons.
• Refer to the data listed in the table ”Operation with mains filter”.

3-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3.3.5 Mains filter


Type
yp Rated data (uk ≈ 6%) Lenze order number
Mains current Inductance for RFI degree A for RFI degree B
9321 1.5 A 24 mH EZN3A2400H002 EZN3B2400H002
9322 2.5 A 15 mH EZN3A1500H003 EZN3B1500H003
9323 4A 9 mH EZN3A0900H004 EZN3B0900H004
9324 7A 5 mH EZN3A0500H007 EZN3B0500H007
9325 13 A 3 mH EZN3A0300H013 EZN3B0300H013
9326 24 A 1.5 mH EZN3A0150H024 EZN3B0150H024
9327 30 A 1.1 mH EZN3A0110H030 EZN3B0110H030
9328 42 A 0.8 mH EZN3A0080H042 EZN3B0080H042
9329 60 A 0.54 mH EZN3A0055H060 EZN3B0055H060
9330 90 A 0.37 mH EZN3A0037H090 EZN3B0037H090
9331 150 A 0.22 mH EZN3A0022H150 EZN3B0022H150
9332 150 A 0.22 mH EZN3A0022H150 EZN3B0022H150

The mains filters for RFI degree B contain additional RFI suppression components.

3.4 Dimensions
The dimensions of the controllers depend on the mechanical installation. ^ 4-1)
(

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 3-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data

3-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical installation

4.1.1 Important notes


• Use the controllers only as built-in devices!
• If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, fluff, grease, aggressive gases):
– Take suitable preventive measures , e.g. separate air duct, installation of filters, regular
cleaning, etc.
• Observe free space!
– You can install several controllers next to each other without free space in a control cabinet.
– Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air!
– Allow a free space of 100 mm at the top and at the bottom.
• Do not exceed the ambient temperature permissible during operation. (^ 3-2)
• With continuous oscillations or vibrations:
– Check whether shock absorbers are necessary.

Possible mounting positions


Vertically on the control cabinet back panel with mains connections at the top:
• With enclosed fixing rails or fixing brackets. ^ 4-2)
(

• Thermally separated with external heat sink


– Punching (^ 4-3)
– ”Cold Plate technique” ^ 4-6)
(

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.2 Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets

A B C K35.0001b

Fig. 4-1 Dimensions for assembly with fixing rails/fixing brackets

Type Fig. a b b1 c c1 d d1 e* e1 g k m
9321, 9322 A 78 384 350 39 - 365 - 250 230 6.5 30 -
9323, 9324 A 97 384 350 48.5 - 365 - 250 230 6.5 30 -
9325, 9326 B 135 384 350 21.5 92 365 - 250 230 6.5 30 -
9327, 9328, 9329 C 250 402 350 22 206 370 24 250 230 6.5 24 11
9330 C 340 672 591 28,5 283 624 38 285 265 11 28 18
9331, 9332 C 450 748.5 680 30.5 389 702 38 285 265 11 28 18

* When using a plug-on fieldbus module:


Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm

Controllers 9321 to 9326


• Assembly preparation:
– Take out fixing rail(s) (accessory kit in the box) and mount them on the controller housing

Controllers 9327 to 9332


• Remove cover:
– Loosen screws (X)
– Swing cover to the top and detach
– Take accessory kit out of the interior of the controller
• Assembly preparation:
– Take out fixing bracket and screws (accessory kit) and mount them on the controller
housing

4-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.3 Assembly with thermally separated power stage (”punching”)


The heat sink of the controllers 9321 ... 9329 can be mounted outside the control cabinet to reduce
the heat generated in the control cabinet. For this, you need an assembly frame with seal (can be
ordered from Lenze).
• Distribution of the power loss:
– approx. 65% via the separated heat sink (heat sink + blower)
– approx. 35% inside the controller
• The type of protection of the separated cooler (heat sink and blower) is IP41.
• The ratings of the controller are still applicable.

Preparation for assembly:


1. Lay the halves of the assembly frame into the slot provided on the controller.
2. Push the frame halves together until the ends lock.
3. Slip the seal over the heat sink and lay into the slot provided.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Dimensions of the types 9321 to 9326

Lenze

d1

d b1 b

d1

g
c f
c1 e
a

Fig. 4-2 Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage

Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e* f g
9321, 9322 112.5 385.5 350 60 95.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
9323, 9324 131.5 385.5 350 79 114.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
9325, 9226 135 385.5 350 117 137.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5

Assembly cut-out
Type Height Width
9321, 9322 82 ±3
9323, 9324 350 ±3 101 ±3
9325, 9326 139 ±3

* When using an attachable fieldbus module:


Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm

4-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Dimensions of the types 9327 to 9329

l
k g
Z

b
n
d4

d3

d2

d1 h m
h
c1 e
c2 f
c3
a
K35.0017

Fig. 4-3 Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage

Type a b c1 c2 c3 d1 d2 d3 d4 e *) f g h
9327, 9328, 9329 280 379 28 140 252 41 141 238 338 250 90 6 9

Cut-out Z
Type Height Width k l m n
9327, 9328, 9329 338 ±1 238 ±1 20 ±2 259 ±2 20 ±2 359 ±2

* When using an attachable fieldbus module:


Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.4 Assembly of variants

Variant EVS932X-Cx (”Cold plate”)


For installation in control cabinets together with other heat sinks in ”Cold plate technology”
(x = order abbreviation; see inner Instructions cover).

Dimensions for types 9321-Cx bis 9326-Cx

Lenze Lenze Lenze

b1 d b b1 d b b1 d b

g g c2
c g e
a c c
a a K35.0059

Fig. 4-4 Dimensions for assembly in ” Cold Plate technique”

Type a b b1 c c2 d e* g
9321-Cx
78 381 350 48 - 367 168 6.5
9322-Cx
9323-Cx
97 381 350 67 - 367 168 6.5
9324-Cx
9325-Cx
135 381 350 105 38 367 168 6.5
9326-Cx

* When using an attachable fieldbus module:


Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm

4-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Dimensions of the types 9327-Cx and 9328-Cx

*)
L
b 1

b
d

g
c 2

c e
c 1
a
a 1
K35.0056

Fig. 4-5 Dimensions for assembly in ” Cold Plate technique”

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 c2 d e* g
9327-Cx
234 250 381 350 110 220 117 367 171 6.5
9328-Cx

* When using an attachable fieldbus module:


Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

• Observe the following points to comply with the technical data:


– Ensure sufficient ventilation of the heat sink.
– The free space behind the control cabinet back panel must be at least 500 mm.
• If you install several controllers in the control cabinet:
– Do not install the controllers on top of each other.
• The cooling path must not exceed the thermal resistances in the table:
Controller Cooling path
Type Power to be dissipated Ploss [W] Rthmax heat sink [K/W]
9321-Cx 80 0.50
9322-Cx 80 0.50
9323-Cx 100 0.40
9324-Cx 155 0.25
9325-Cx 210 0.19
9326-Cx 360 0.10
9327-Cx 410 0.09
9328-Cx 610 0.06

• The temperature of the cold plate must not exceed +85 °C.
• Penetration depth t of the screws into the basic plate of the controller:
8 mm $ t $ 10 mm
• For the bore pattern and surface quality of the heat sink please consult the factory.
• Apply the heat conducting paste (accessory kit) to the cold plate of the controller.

4-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2 Electrical installation

For information about the installation according to EMC, see chapter 4.3. ^ 4-34)
(

4.2.1 Protection of persons

Danger!
All power terminals carry voltage up to 3 minutes after mains disconnection.

4.2.1.1 Residual-current circuit breakers


Labelling of RCCBs Meaning

AC-sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type AC)

Pulse-current sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type A)

All-current sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type B)

Definition In the following text “RCCB” is used for “residual-current circuit breaker”.

Protection of persons and animals DIN VDE 0100 with residual-current operated protective devices (RCCB):
• The controllers are equipped with a mains rectifier. If a short-circuit to frame occurs, a smooth DC residual current
can block the activation of the DC sensitive or pulse-current sensitive RCCBs and thus destroy the protective
function for all units connected. We therefore recommend:
– ”pulse-current sensitive RCCB” or ”all-current RCCB” in systems equipped with controllers with single-phase
mains connection (L1/N).
– ”all-current sensitive RCCB” in systems equipped with controllers with three-phase mains connection (L1/L2/L3).

Rated residual current Please observe the rated residual current for the selection of the RCCB:
• Controller with single-phase mains connection: 30 mA rated residual current
• Controller with three-phase mains connection: 300 mA rated residual current

The RCCB can be activated unintentionally under the following conditions:


• In the event of capacitive leakage currents between the cable screens (especially with wall mounting).
• Simultaneous connection of several inverters to the mains
• If RFI filters are used.

Installation The RCCB must only be installed between the supplying mains and the controller.

Standards All-current sensitive RCCBs are described in the European Standard EN EN 50178 and in the IEC 755.
(All-current sentitive RCCB) The EN 50178 has been harmonized and has been effective since October 1997. It replaces the national standard
VDE 0160.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-9


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.1.2 Insulation
The controllers have an electrical isolation (insulating distance) between the power terminals and
the control terminals as well as to the housing:
• Terminals X1 and X5 have a double basic insulation (double insulating distance, safe mains
isolation to VDE0160, EN50178). The protection against contact is ensured without any
further measures.
• The control inputs and outputs of all controllers are electrically isolated.

Danger!
• Terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10 have a single basic insulation (single insulating
distance).
• Protection against contact in the event of fault is ensured only by additional measures.
• If an external voltage supply (24V DC) is used, the insulation level of the controller depends
on the insulation level of the voltage source.

reinforced insulation
single basic insulation

Fig. 4-6 Basic insulation in the controller

4.2.1.3 Replacement of defective fuses


Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied. (^ 3-6)
• For single drives, the controller carries a hazardous voltage up to three minutes after mains
disconnection.
• In a DC-bus connection, all controllers must be inhibited and separated from the mains.

4.2.1.4 Mains disconnection


Make a safety disconnection between the controller and the mains only via a contactor at the input
side.
• Please observe that all drives connected to the DC bus must be inhibited.

4-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.2 Protection of the controller

Stop!
The controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components.
• Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of electrostatic charge:
– Discharge by touching the PE fixing screw or another grounded metal part in the control
cabinet.

• Length of the screws for the connection to the screen cable/screen plate for the types 9327
to 9332: < 12 mm
• Controller protection by means of external fuses. (^ 3-6)
• Protect unused control inputs and outputs with plugs or covers (included in the contents of
delivery) for the Sub-D inputs.
• Frequent mains switching can overload the internal switch-on current limitation. For cyclic
mains switching, the controller can be switched on every three minutes as a maximum.
• The controllers 9324, 9326, 9328 and 9329 must only be operated with the appropriate mains
filters. (^ 3-7)
• In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage only after the visible
humidity has evaporated.

4.2.3 Motor protection


• Complete motor protection according to VDE:
– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring.
– Required for group drives (motors connected in parallel to a controller)
– We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats with PTC characteristic to
monitor the motor temperature.

Stop!
As standard Lenze three-phase AC motors are equipped with PTC thermistors. If motors from other
manufacturers are used, carry out all steps required for the adaptation to the controller. (^ 4-28)

• When using motors with insulation which is not suitable for inverter operation:
– Please contact your motor supplier.
Lenze AC motors are designed for inverter operation.
• With the corresponding parameter setting, the controllers generate field frequencies up to
600 Hz:
– With motors not suited for the application, dangerous overspeeds may occur and destroy
the drive.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-11


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.4 Mains types/ conditions


Please observe the restrictions for each mains type!
Mains Operation of the controllers Notes
With grounded neutral No restrictions Observe controller ratings
(TT/TN mains) • Mains r.m.s. current: ^ 3-3
With isolated neutral Possible, if the controller is protected in the event of an Safe operation in the event of an earth fault at the
(IT mains) earth fault in the supplying mains. inverter output cannot be guaranteed.
• Possible, if appropriate earth fault detections are
available and
• the controller is separated from the mains
immediately.
With grounded phase Operation is only possible with one variant Contact Lenze
DC-supply via + UG/-UG The DC voltage must be symmetrical to PE. The controller will be destroyed when grounding + UG or
-UG.

4.2.5 Interaction with compensation equipment


• The controllers take up a very low fundamental reactive power from the supplying AC mains.
Therefore compensation is not necessary.
• If the controllers are operated at mains with compensation, this equipment must be used with
chokes.
– For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.

4.2.6 Specification of all cables used


• The cables used must comply with the required approvals of the application site
(e. g. UL).
• The prescribed minimum cross-sections of PE conductors must be maintained in all cases.
The cross-section of the PE conductor must be at least as large as the cross-section of the
power connections.
• The screening quality of a cable is determined by
– a good screen connection
– a low screen resistance
Only use screens with tin-plated or nickel-plated copper braids!
Screens of steel braid are not suitable.
– For the overlapping degree of the screen braid:
A min. of 70 % to 80 % with an overlapping angle of 90°

4-12 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7 Power connections

Controller Preparations for the power connection


9321 ... 9326 • Remove the covers of the power connections:
– Unlatch to the front by gentle pressure.
– Pull upwards (mains connection) or downwards (motor connection).

9327 ... 9332 • Remove cover:


– Loosen screws (X) (see Fig. 4-1).
– Swing cover to the top and detach.
– Take the accessory kit out of the interior of the controller.

4.2.7.1 Mains connection


Types 9321 to 9326 Types 9327 to 9332


L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG

PE
PE

Correct screen connection with screened cables Correct screen connection with screened cables:
(required parts in the accessory kit): • Connect the screen with suitable clamp on the conducting control
• Screw sreen plate € on fixing bracket ó. cabinet mounting plate.
• Fix screen using cable lugs. Do not use as a strain relief! • To improve the screen connection: Connect screen additionally to
• To improve the screen connection: Connect screen additionally to the stud next to the power connections.
the stud next to the power connections.

Fig. 4-7 Proposal for mains connection

• Connect the mains cables to the screw terminals L1, L2, L3.
• Connect cables for brake unit (935X), supply module (934X) or further controllers in the DC
bus connection to the screw terminals +UG, -UG at the top of the controller.
• Max. permissible cable cross-sections and tightening torques:
Type
yp Terminals
Max. permissible
L1, L2, L3, + UG, -UG PE connection
cable cross-sections
9321 - 9326 4 mm2 1) 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin) 3.4 Nm (30 lbin)
9327 - 9329 25 mm2 2) 4 Nm (35 lbin)
9330 - 9331 95 mm2 2) 7 Nm (62 lbin)
9332 120 mm2 2) 12 Nm (106.2 lbin)

1) with pin-end connector: 6 mm 2


with wire crimp cap 4 mm2
2) with ring cable lug The cross-section is only limited by the cable cut-out in the housing.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-13


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Fuses
Fuses and cable cross-sections The specifications in chapter 3.3.4 are recommendations and refer to the ^ 3-6
application
• in control cabinets and machines
• installation in the cable duct
• max. ambient temperature + 40 °C.
Selection of the cable cross-section For selection take into account the voltage drop in the event of load
application (to DIN 18015 part 1: ≤ 3 %).
Cable and controller protection on the AC side • By means of standard commercial fuses.
(L1, L2, L3) • Fuses in UL-conform plants must have UL-approval.
• The rated voltages of the fuses must be dimensioned according to the
mains voltage at the site. The activation characteristic is defined with ”H”
or ”K5”.
Cable and controller protection on the DC side • By means of recommended DC fuses.
(+ UG, -UG) • The fuses/fuse holders recommended by Lenze are UL approved.
For DC group drives or supply using a DC Observe the information given in Part F of the Manual.
source:
Connection of a brake unit If the unit is connected to the terminals + UG / -UG, the fuses and
cross-sections indicated in chapter 3.3.4 are not valid. These unit-specific
data can be obtained from the technical documentation for the brake unit.
Further information For cable and controller protection see the chapter ”Accessories” in
“Planning”.
Further standards The compliance with other standards (e.g.: VDE 0113, VDE 0289, etc.)
remains the responsibility of the user.

4-14 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7.2 Motor connection


We recommend the use of screened motor cables only, because of the EMC safety.

Note!
The screening of the motor cable is only required to comply with existing standards (e.g. VDE 0160,
EN 50178).

Types 9321 to 9326


Correct screen connection with screened cables
(required parts in the accessory kit):
• Screen plate € on fixing bracket. ó
• Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal contact, if
necessary, (see^ 4-28 ) with cable lugs. Do not use as a
strain relief!
• To improve the screen connection: Connect screens
PE additionally at the PE stud next to the motor connections.
T1 T2
W
U V W
U


Types 9327 to 9329
Correct screen connection with screened cables:
• Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal
contact, if necessary, (see ^ 4-28 ) with cable
lugs. Do not use as a strain relief!
• To improve the screen connection: Connect screens
PE
additionally at the PE stud next to the motor
T1 U V W
connections.

T2

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-15


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Types 9330 and 9331

PE • Strain relief by using cable binders €.


• Correct screen connection with screened cables:
T1 – Apply motor cable screen to the screening plate using
clamp and screws M5x12 ó.
T2
U V W
– Fix the screen of the thermal contact (see ^ 4-28 ) at
the stud PE net to the motor connection with a surface
as large as possible.

M5 X 12

‚


Type 9332
• Strain relief by using cable clamps and screws M4x12. ì.
PE – Additional strain relief/fixing can be achieved by using
cable binders. €.
T1
• Correct screen connection with screened cables:
U V W – Apply motor cable screen to the screening plate using
clamp and screws M5x12 ó.
^
T2
– Fix the screen of the thermal contact (see 4-28 ) at
the stud PE net to the motor connection with a surface
M4 X 12 as large as possible.
ƒ
M5 X 12
‚


Fig. 4-8 Proposal for motor connection

4-16 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

• Observe the max. permissible motor cable length:


ar = 400 V (+ 10%) ar = 480 V (+ 10%)
Type fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz
9321/9322 up to 50 m up to 45 m up to 50 m up to 25 m
9323 - 9332 up to 50 m up to 50 m up to 50 m up to 50 m
The max. permissible motor cable length of types 9323 - 9332 will be reduced if the motor has more than a single core.
• Two parallel single cores: Lmax = 17 m
• Three parallel single cores: Lmax = 9 m

• Connect the motor cables to the screw terminals U, V, W.


– Observe correct pole connection.
– Maximum motor cable length: 50 m.
– Max. permissible cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques:

Max. permissible cable


Tightening torques for terminals
cross-sections
Power Screen/
T1, T2 U, V, W PE connection T1, T2
Type connections Strain relief
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm 3.4 Nm
9321 - 9326 4 mm2 1)
(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin) (30 lbin)
9327 - 9329 25 mm2 2) 5 Nm (44.3 lbin) M4: 11.7
M4 7 Nm
N (15 lbin)
lbi ) 0 5 ... 0.6
0.5 0 6 Nm
N
1.5 mm2
M5: 33.4
4 Nm (30 lbin) (4.44 ... 5.3
(4 5 3 lbin)
9330 - 9331 95 mm2 2) 15 Nm (132.8 lbin)
9332 120 mm2 2) 30 Nm (265.5 lbin)

1) with pin-end connector: 6 mm2


with wire crimp cap 4 mm2
2) with ring cable lug The cross-section is only limited by the cable cut-out in the housing.

Note!
Switching on the motor side of the controller is permitted only for emergency switch-off.

4.2.7.3 Connection of a brake unit


• When connecting a brake unit (brake module with internal brake resistor or brake chopper
with external brake resistor) observe the corresponding Operating Instructions in all cases.

Stop!
• Design the circuit so that, if the temperature monitoring of the brake unit is activated,
– the controllers are inhibited (X5/28 = LOW).
– the mains is disconnected.
• Examples:
– Chapter 4.3, “Installation of a CE-typical drive system”. (^ 4-34)
– Fig. 4-9, “Decentralized supply for DC-bus connection of several drives”. (^ 4-18)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-17


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7.4 DC bus connection of several drives

Decentralized supply with brake module

K 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E
O F F
F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6
K 1 Z 4
O N R B

J R B Z 1 Z 2
K 1

F 7 F 8 F 9 F 1 0
R B 1 R B 2 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G

9 3 5 2 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X
Z 3
U V W P E P E P E U V W P E
2 8 A 4 2 8 A 4

K 1 K 1
X 1 X 2

R F R R F R

M M
P E 3 ~ P E 3 ~
K35.0113

Fig. 4-9 Decentralized supply for DC-bus connection of several drives`


Z1, Z2 Mains filter
Z3 Brake chopper
Z4 Brake resistor
F1...F6 Protection, see “Cable protection” ( ^ 3-6 ) / “Mains connection” ( ^ 4-13 )
^ 3-6 ) / “Mains
^
F7...F10 DC bus fuse; fuse holder with / without alarm contact, see “Cable protection” (
connection” ( 4-13 )
K1 Main contactor

Stop!
• Set the DC-bus voltage thresholds of controller and brake unit to the same values.
– Controller using C0173
– Brake unit using switches S1 and S2
• A bimetal relais is required for the monitoring of the mains supply.

Tip!
Please observe the specifications in part F of the Manual and the application report “DC bus
connection” for the dimensioning and rating of the components.

4-18 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Central supply with supply module


• When connecting the supply module, the corresponding operating instructions must be
observed.
K 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 1 F 2 F 3

Z 1
Z 1
F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9
L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G

9 3 4 1 - 9 3 4 3 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X
Z 2
P E U V W P E U V W

M M
P E 3 ~ P E 3 ~ K35.0114

Fig. 4-10 Central supply for DC-bus connection of several drives


Z1 Mains supply filter
Z2 Supply module
F1...F6 Protection, see “Cable protection” ( ^ 3-6 ) / “Mains connection” ( ^ 4-13 )
^ 3-6 ) / “Mains
^
F4...F9 DC bus fuse; fuse holder with / without alarm contact, see “Cable protection” (
connection” ( 4-13 )
K1 Main contactor

Tip!
If the power supply of the supply module is not sufficient, a parallel supply can be installed via the
mains supply input of a controller (see Manual, Part F). In this case, the controllers can only be
operated with the assigned mains filters.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-19


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.8 Control connections

4.2.8.1 Control cables


• Connect control cables to the screw terminals:
Max. permissible cable cross-section Screw-tightening torques
1.5 mm2 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

• We recommend a single-ended screening of all cables for analog signals to avoid signal
distortion.
• Connect the screens of the control cables
– with the collective screen plate to the front metal surface
(max screw length 12 mm).

4.2.8.2 Assignment of the control terminals

Protection against inverse polarity


• The protection against polarity reversal prevents the wrong connection of the internal control
inputs. It is however possible to overcome the protection against polarity reversal by applying
great force. The controller cannot be enabled in this case. The controller cannot be enabled.

Overview
H I

X 4
L O
G N D
A 1
2 8
E 1

A 2
A 3
E 2

X 5
E 3

A 4
E 4

S T
E 5

S T
3 9

5 9
3
1

X 6
4
2
7

6 3 7
6 2

K35.0115

Fig. 4-11 Layout of the control connections on the front of the controller

4-20 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Terminal Use Level Data


(Default setting is printed in bold)
Analog 1, 2 Difference input master voltage -10 V to + 10 V Resolution:
inputs (Main speed setpoint)
6 5 5 mV (11 bit + sign)
4 3
2 1
Jumper X3
Difference input master current -20 mA to + 20 mA Resolution:
6 5 20 µA (10 bit + sign)
4 3
2 1
X6
Jumper X3
3, 4 Difference input master voltage Jumper X3 has no -10 V to + 10 V Resolution:
(additional speed setpoint) effect 5 mV (11 bit + sign)
Analog 62 Monitor 1 -10 V to + 10 V; Resolution:
p
outputs (Actual speed) max. 2 mA 20 mV (9 bit + sign)
63 Monitor 2 -10 V to + 10 V; Resolution:
(torque setpoint) max. 2 mA 20 mV (9 bit + sign)
7 Internal ground, GND - -
Digital
g 28 Controller enable (RFR) HIGH LOW: 0 ... + 4 V
i
inputs E1 freely assignable HIGH HIGH: + 13 ... + 30 V
(remove CW rotation / QSP)
IInputt currentt ffor 24V
24V:
E2 freely assignable HIGH
8 mA per input
(remove CCW rotation / QSP)
E3 freely assignable HIGH Reading and writing of the inputs:
(enable JOG-setpoint 1) once per ms (average value)
val e)
E4 freely assignable HIGH
(TRIP set)
E5 freely assignable @
Signal LOW HIGH
(TRIP-reset)
X5
Digital A1 freely assignable LOW LOW: 0 ... + 4 V
p
outputs (TRIP) HIGH: + 13 ... + 30 V
A2 freely assignable LOW
(nact. < nx) Output current:
max. 50 mA A per output
t t
A3 freely assignable HIGH
(RDY) (external resistance at least 480 Ω at
24 V)
A4 freely assignable HIGH
(Mmax) Updating of the outputs:
39 Ground of the digital inputs and outputs - once per ms
59 Supply input of the control module: -
24 V external (I > 1A)

Note!
To change the jumper, remove plug-on module, if necessary.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-21


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.8.3 Connection diagrams


Connection of analog signals
Analog signals are connected via the 2 x 4-pole terminal block X6.
Depending on the use of the analog input, the jumper of X3 must be set accordingly.
Connection for external voltage supply
STOP!
• The maximum permitted voltage difference between an external voltage
source and theGND1 (terminal X6/7) of the controller is 10V (common mode).
• The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND1 (terminal X6/7)
and the PE of the controller is 50V.
100k

100k

93XX
X3
100k

100k
242R

GND1 GND1 U U

3,3nF
GND1
X6 1 2 3 4 7 X6 7 62 63

= =
+ +

Limit the voltage difference


• by overvoltage clamping components or
100k

100k

93XX
242R

GND1 • by direct connection of terminal(s) X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 to GND1 and PE (see
figure).
3,3nF

X6 1 2 3 4 7

= =
+ +

Connection for internal voltage supply


Configuration of the internal voltage supply:
• Set a freely assignable analog output (AOUTx) to HIGH level.
• E. g. terminal X6/63: Assign FIXED100% to C0436 ^ 4-20
10V are thus applied across terminal X6/63.
100k

100k

Note!
93XX Use one of the predefined configurations in C0005 for this application. With
X3 C0005 = XX1X (e. g. 1010 for speed control with control via terminals) FIXED
100% is automatically assigned to the output X6/63 (corresponds to 10 V at the
100k

100k
242R

GND1 GND1 U U output X6/63).

3,3nF
GND1
X6 1 2 3 4 7 X6 7 62 63
10k
10k

4-22 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Connection of digital signals

Analog signals are connected via the 2 x 7-pole terminal block X5.

The levels of the digital inputs and outputs are PLC compatible.

Only use relays with low-current contacts for the switching of the signal cables

(recommendation: relays with gold-plated contacts).

Connection for external power supply


The external voltage source supplies the digital inputs and outputs.
GND 2
• If the external supply voltage is also to be used as an alternative supply of the
_
24V control electronics (backup operation in case of mains failure):
+

=
93XX – For this, make the connection illustrated as a broken line.
– The external voltage source must be able to drive a current > 1A.
22k 10R This ensures that all actual values, even after mains disconnection, are still
Prozessor-
board detected and processed.
• Connection of the external voltage source:
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k

– supply voltage at X5/59


– external ground at X5/39
GND 2
X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59
STOP!
R L _ The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND2 (terminal X5/39) and
RFR =
+
the PE of the controller is 50 V.
24V

QSP TRIP Mmax


JOG TRIP-
Set/Reset
|nist| < nx RDY

Limit the voltage difference


93XX • by overvoltage clamping components or
• by a direct PE connection of terminal 39 (see figure).
E5 39 A1 A2

_
=
+

Connection for internal power supply


Configuration of the internal voltage supply
GND 2
24V • Set a freely assignable digital output (DIGOUTx) to HIGH level.
_
• For example terminal X5/A1: Assign C0117/1 with FIXED1. 24V are thus
+

=
93XX
applied across terminal X5/A1.
22k 10R
Prozessor-
board Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined configurations in C0005.
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k

The output is assigned automatically with FIXED1 (corresponds to 24 V at


terminal X5/A1) by C0005 = XX1X (e. g. 1010 for speed control via terminals).
GND 2
X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59

R L
RFR

QSP FIXED1 Mmax


JOG TRIP-
Set/Reset
|nist| < nx RDY

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-23


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Digital frequency input (X9) / Digital frequency output (X10)

Note!
Use prefabricated Lenze cables for the connection to the digital frequency input (X9) or digital
frequency output (X10). Otherwise, use cables with twisted pairs and screened wires (A, O / B, B
/ Z, Z) (see diagram).

Digital frequency output X10 Digital frequency input X9


Features: Features:
• Sub-D female connector, 9-pole • Sub-D male connector, 9-pole
• Output frequency: 0 - 500 kHz • Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
• Current load capacity per channel: max. 20 mA • Current consumption per channel: max. 6 mA
• Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track • Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track
• X10 has a different basic setting depending on the selected configuration • Possible input signals:
(C0005) – Incremental encoder with two 5 V complementary signals shifted by 90°
– Factory setting: (TTL encoder).
Encoder simulation of the resolver signal – Encoder simulation of the master
• Load capacity: • PIN 8 serves to monitor the cable or the connected controller:
– Parallel connection: – When this PIN shows a LOW level, the SD3 monitoring responds.
Up to 3 slave drives – If the monitoring is not required, this input can be connected to + 5V.
– Series connection: • The input is disconnected at C0540 = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
250 kHz digital master frequency: up to 22 slave drives
500 kHz digital master frequency: up to 10 slave drives
• When PIN 8 (EN) shows a LOW level, the master is initialized (e.g. if the mains
was disconnected). The slave can thus monitor the master.

M a s t e r S la v e
X 1 0 X 9
Æ

B m m 2 A W G
1 1 B
F o r C W r o t a t io n
A 2 2 A 0 .1 4 2 6
A
A 3 3 A
A
4 4
B
G N D 5 5 G N D 0 .5 2 0
B
Z 6 6 Z
0 .1 4 2 6 Z
Z 7 7 Z
L a m p Z
e n a b le
8 8 c o n tro l 0 .5 2 0
B 9 9 B 0 .1 4 2 6
C a b le le n g t h m a x . 5 0 m

9 p o le S u b - D c o n n e c to r 9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r

Pin assignment X10 Pin assignment X9


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B O O +5 V GND1 Z Z EN B B O O +5 V GND1 Z Z LC B

4-24 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

STATE-BUS (X5/ ST)


The state bus is a controller-specific bus system for simple monitoring in a network of drives:
• Controls all drives connected to the network according to the preselected state.
• Up to 20 controllers can be connected (total cable length STATE-BUS < 5m).
• Connection of STATE-BUS cables to terminals X5/ST.

Stop!
Do not apply an external voltage across terminals X5/ST.

K 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E

O F F F 1 F 2 F 3 F 1 F 2 F 3 F 1 F 2 F 3

K 1
O N
Z 1 Z 1 Z 1

K 1

F 4 F 5 F 4 F 5 F 4 F 5
L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G

9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X 9 3 2 X - 9 3 3 X
P E U V W S T 3 9 S T P E 2 8 A 4 P E W S T 3 9 S T P E 2 8 A 4 P E W 3 9 P E 2 8 A 4
U V U V S T S T

K 1 K 1 K 1

R F R R F R R F R

K35.0122

Fig. 4-12 Monitoring of a network of drives with the STATE-BUS


Z1 Mains filter
F1...F5 Protection, see “Cable protection” ( ^ 3-6 ) / “Mains connection” ( ^ 4-13 )
K1 Main contactor

Tip!
Further information can be obtained from the Manual of your controller.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-25


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

System bus connection (X4)

K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

OFF F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3

K1 Z1 Z1 Z1
ON

K1

L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG

932X - 933X 932X - 933X 932X - 933X


PE PE PE PE
U V W HI LO GND PE 28 A4 U V W HI LO GND 28 A4 U V W HI LO GND PE 28 A4

RA1 RA2

K1 K1 K1

RFR RFR RFR

K35.0123

Fig. 4-13 Wiring system bus


RA1, RA2 Bus terminating resistors 120 W (included in the accessory kit)

• Connection via pluggable screw terminals (double terminals can be used).


• Only connect terminals of the same designation.
• Features of the system cable:

Total cable length up to 300 m 300 m to 1000 m


Cable type LIYCY 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 CYPIMF 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2
twisted-pair with screening twisted-pair with screening
Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI) Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI)
Pair 2: 2*GND Pair 2: 2*GND
Cable resistance χ≤ 40 Ω/km ≤40 Ω/km
Capacitance per unit ≤ 130 nF/km ≤60 nF/km
length

• Connection of the bus terminating resistors:


– One resistor 120 Ω each on the first and last bus device.
– On the 93XX controller the resistor can be screwed directly under the terminals X4/HI and
X4/LO.

4-26 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Features:
• CAN-based with bus protocol according to CANopen (CAL-based Communication Profile
DS301)
• Bus extension:
– 25 m for max. 1 Mbit/s baud rate
– up to 1 km with reduced baud rate
• Very reliable data transmission (Hamming distance = 6)
• Signal level according to ISO 11898
• Up to 63 bus devices are possible
• Access to all Lenze parameters
• Master functions are integrated into the controller
– Data exchange possible between controllers without participation of a master system
(current ratio control, speed synchronization, etc.)
The following connections of the system bus connection are possible:
• Connection to a decentral terminal extension for digital and analog inputs and outputs
• Connection to a superimposed control (PLC, position control, operating terminal)
• Connection between several controllers

Automation interface (X1)


The automation interface (X1) is used for the connection of different plug-on modules
• Operating module
• Fieldbus modules
– 2102 LECOM-A/B/LI
– 2111 INTERBUS
– 2112 INTERBUS loop
– 2131 PROFIBUS-DP and 2133 PROFIBUS-DP
– 2174 CAN addressing module
– 2175 DeviceNet / CANopen

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-27


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.9 Motor temperature monitoring


Selection of the feedback • Continuous temperature sensor KTY
system – “Linear” temperature sensor in the motor winding (standard for Lenze motors MDXKX, MDXQA and MDXMA)
• Temperature sensor PTC
– PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
• Thermal contact TKO
– Thermostat/normally closed contact
Other monitoring KTY, PTC and TKO do not offer full protection. To improve the monitoring, Lenze recommends a bimetal relay.
Alternative monitoring Comparators (CMP1 ... CMP3) monitor and a time element (TRANS1 ... TRANS4) limits the motor current for small speeds or motor
standstill.
This function can be implemented by interconnecting the corresponding function blocks.
Reactions different, depending on the temperature monitoring. ^ 8-15

Stop!
Do not connect an external voltage to the inputs.

Lenze motors Motors of other manufacturers


MDXKX, MDXQA and MDXMA with thermal contact with sensor for continuous with thermal contact or
temperature detection PTC acc. to DIN
44081/44082
Connection • Resolver input X7: Terminals T1/T2 next to the • Resolver input X7: Terminals T1/T2 next to the
– Pin X7/8 = + , terminals U, V, W – Pin X7/8 = + , terminals U, V, W
Pin X7/9 = - Pin X7/9 = -
• Encoder input X8: • Encoder input X8:
– Pin X8/8 = + , – Pin X8/8 = + ,
Pin X8/5 = - Pin X8/5 = -
Fault messages (MONIT-)OH3 (MONIT-)OH7 (MONIT-)OH8 (MONIT-)OH3 (MONIT-)OH7 (MONIT-)OH8
Possible reactions The corresponding monitoring and thus the following codes are preset under C0086
• Trip • Warning (C0584 • Trip (C0585 = 0) • Trip • Warning (C0584 • Trip (C0585 = 0)
(C0583 = 0) = 2) • Warning (C0583 = 0) = 2) • Warning
• OFF • OFF (C0585 = 2) • OFF • OFF (C0585 = 2)
(C0583 = 3) (C0584 = 3) • OFF (C0585 = 3) (C0583 = 3) (C0584 = 3) • OFF (C0585 = 3)
Tripping fixed at 150 ° C adjustable fixed, (depending on the fixed at 150 °C adjustable fixed, (depending on the
temperature 45°C ... 150°C PTC/thermal contact): 45°C ... 150°C PTC/thermal contact):
(C0121) PTC: at Rϑ > 1600 Ω (C0121) PTC: at Rϑ > 1600 Ω

Notes • Monitoring is active in the default • Deactivate monitoring • Input characteristic. ( 4-29) ^ • Deactivate monitoring
setting. via X7 or X8 under • Deactivate monitoring via X7 or X8 via X7 or X8 under
• If resolver (X7) and encoder (X8) are C0583= 3 and C0584= 3 under C0583= 3 and C0584= 3 C0583= 3 and C0584= 3
operated together: • Connection to DIN • Connection to DIN
– Connect KTY only at one connector 44081 44081
(X7 or X8) (see also Fig. 4-14). (see also Fig. 4-14).
– Do not connect KTY connection of • We recommend a Ziehl
the other female connector PTC (up to 150 °C):
• For further information on the K15301075 or a
connection of the thermal sensor, thermostat.
please consult the description of the
feedback system

4-28 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Types 9321 to 9326 Types 9327 to 9329 Internal connection

24 V
1
7,4k
5 X10 3,3k
MONIT-OH8
T1
PE
ϑ
T1 U V W
PE
T1 T2 2,7k
T2
U
U V
V W
W
X6 7
T2

93xx
K350052

Types 9330 and 9331 Type 9332


PE PE

T1 T1

U V W U V W
T2 T2

Fig. 4-14 Connection of a thermistor or PTC thermistor to terminals T1 and T2 and internal connection

Note!
• In the prefabricated Lenze system cables for Lenze servo motors the cable for the
temperature feedback is already included. The cables are designed for wiring according to
EMC.
• If you use cables of your own:
– Always lay cables separately from motor cables.

4.2.9.1 User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor


R [O h m ] Code Subcode Description
C1190 0 Evaluation of the Lenze standard motor temperature sensor
a (operating mode
1)
R 2 1 Evaluation of a user-specific thermal sensor. The operating
(C 1 1 9 2 /2 )
(operating mode point is in the almost linear area (a) of the sensor
R 1 2) characteristic. The operating point is provided by two
(C 1 1 9 2 /1 ) interpolation points. Interpolation between these two points.
C1191 1 (100 °C) Definition of the temperature interpolation points which are
2 (150 °C) assigned to the resistances of the sensor.
T 1 T [° C ] C1192 1 (1670 W)
T 2
(C 1 1 9 1 /1 ) (C 1 1 9 1 /2 )
Definition of the sensor resistances
2 (2225 W)

Example of a sensor characteristic for continuous temperature


detection

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-29


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.10 Feedback systems


Different feedback systems can be connected to the controller:
• Resolver feedback (factory setting)
• Encoder feedback
– Incremental encoder TTL
– Sin/cos encoder
– Sin/cos encoder with serial communication (single turn)
– Sin/cos encoder with serial communication (multi turn)
Resolver signal or encoder signal can be output for slaves at the digital frequency output X10.
• Connection as shown in the figures:
– Use twisted pair cables and screened pair cables.
– Connect the screen at both ends.
– Use indicated cable cross-sections.
• The feedback system is activated under C0025.

Sensorless control SSC


The sensorless controller (SSC) should not be used for new drive solutions (C0025 = 1).
Instead use a vector control EVF 9300 or contact Lenze.

4-30 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Resolver connection (X7)


• In all configurations predefined under C0005, a resolver can be used as feedback system. An
adjustment is not necessary.

Note!
Use pre-cut Lenze system cables to connect the resolver.
Please contact Lenze before you use other resolvers.

Features:
• 2-pole resolver (V = 10 V, f = 4 kHz)
• Resolver and resolver cable are monitored for open circuit (fault indication Sd2)

C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m X 7

Æ
R e s o lv e r + R E F m m 2 A W G
1
-R E F 0 .5 2 0
2
3
+ C O S
4
-C O S
5
+ S IN
6 0 .1 4 2 6
-S IN
7
+ P T C
8
-P T C
9
P T C

9 p o le S u b - D fe m a le c o n n e c to r

Fig. 4-15 Resolver connection

Assignment of the female connector (X7)


Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

^ ^
Signal + Ref -Ref GND1 + COS -COS + SIN -SIN + PTC -PTC
( 4-28 ) ( 4-28 )

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-31


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Encoder connection (X8)


An incremental encoder or a sin/cos encoder can be connected to this input.

Note!
Use pre-cut Lenze system cables to connect the encoder.

• The encoder supply voltage VCC5_E can be adjusted in the range from 5 V to 8 V under C0421
– to set the encoder supply
– to compensate the voltage drop on the encoder cable, if necessary
∆U ≈ 2 * cable length * resistance/m * Iencoder

Stop!
Observe the connection voltage of the encoder system used. If C0421 is set too high, the encoder
might be destroyed.

C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m X 8
S IN

R e fS IN B Æ R e fS IN = 2 ,5 V
0 ,5 V
S IN B m m 2 A W G
1
R e fC O S A C O S
2 0 .1 4 2 6
C O S A R e fC O S = 2 ,5 V
3 0 ,5 V
V c c V C C 5 _ E
4
G N D G N D 1 .0 1 7
5 F o r C W r o ta t io n
Z / - 4 8 5 Z
E n c o d e r
6 A
Z / + 4 8 5 Z
7 0 .1 4 2 6
A
+ K T Y + K T Y
K T Y
8 B
-K T Y -K T Y
9 B

Z
9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r Z

Fig. 4-16 Encoder connection

4-32 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Incremental encoder
Features:
• Incremental encoders with two 5 V complementary signals which are shifted by 90 • (TTL
encoder) can be connected.
– The zero track can be connected (as option).
• 9-pole Sub-D female connector
• Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
• Current consumption per channel: 6 mA
Assignment of the male connector (X8)
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

^
Signal B O O VCC5_E GND (-PTC) Z Z + PTC B
( 4-28 )

Sin/ cos encoder


Features:
• The following encoders can be connected
– sin/cos encoders with a rated voltage from 5 V to 8 V.
– Sine-cosine encoders with a communication interface of type Stegmann SCS/M70xxx
(The initialization time of the controller is increased to approx. 2 seconds).
• 9-pole Sub-D female connector
• Internal resistance Ri = 221 Ω
• Voltage sine and cosine track: 1 Vpp ±0.2 V
• Voltage RefSIN and RefCOS: +2.5 V

Note!
For drives with track indications assign: sine, sine and cosine, cosine:
Assign RefSIN with sine and RefCOS with cosine .

Assignment of the male connector (X8)


Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

^
Signal SIN RefCOS COS VCC5_E GND (-PTC) Z or -RS485 Z or + RS485 + PTC RefSIN
( 4-28 )

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-33


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.3 Installation of a CE-typical drive system


General notes • The electromagnetic compatibility of a machine depends on the type of installation and care taken. Please observe:
– Assembly
– Filters
– Shielding
– Grounding
• For diverging installations, the conformity to the CE EMC Directive requires a check of the machine or system regarding the EMC limit
values. This is for instance valid for
– Use of unscreened cables
– Use of group RFI filters instead of assigned RFI filters
– Operation without mains filter
• The compliance of the machine application with the EMC Directive is in the responsibility of the user.
– If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will operate without any EMC problems caused by the drive
system, and that compliance with the EMC Directive and the EMC law is achieved.
– If devices which do not comply with the CE requirement concerning noise immunity EN 50082-2 are operated close to the controller,
these devices may be disturbed electromagnetically by the controllers.
Assembly • Connect controller, mains choke, and mains filter to the grounded mounting plate with a wire of large a cross-section as possible:
– Mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc-coated, stainless steel) allow permanent contact.
– Painted plates are not suitable for installation in accordance with the EMC.
• If you use several mounting plates:
– Connect as much surface as possible of the mounting plates (e.g. with copper bands).
• Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.
• Do not use the same terminal strip for mains input and motor output.
• Cable guides as close as possible to the reference potential. Unguided cables have the same effect as aerials.
Filters • Use mains filters or RFI filters and mains chokes which are assigned to the controller:
– RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a permissible value.
– Mains chokes reduce low-frequency interferences which depend on the motor cable and its length.
– Mains filters combine the functions of mains choke and RFI filter.
Shielding • Connect the screen of the motor cable to the controller
– to the screen connection of the controller.
– additionally to the mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
– Recommendation: For the connection, use ground clamps on bare metal mounting surfaces.
• If contactors, motor-protecting switches or terminals are located in the motor cable:
– Connect the screens of the connected cables also to the mounting plate, with a surface as large as possible.
• Connect the screen in the motor terminal box or on the motor housing to PE:
– Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a connection of the screen and the motor housing.
• If the mains cable between mains filter and controller is longer than 300mm:
– Screen mains cables.
– Connect the screen of the mains cable directly to the inverter and to the mains filter and connect it to the mounting plate with as large a
surface as possible.
• Use of a brake chopper:
– Connect the screen of the brake resistor cable directly to the mounting plate, at the brake chopper and the brake resistor with as large a
surface as possible.
– Connect the screen of the cable between controller and brake chopper directly to the mounting plate, at the inverter and the brake
chopper with a surface as large as possible.
• Screen the control cables:
– Connect both screen ends of the digital control cables.
– Connect one screen end of the analog control cables.
– Always connect the screens to the screen connection at the controller over the shortest possible distance.
• Application of controllers in residential areas:
– To limit the radio interference, use an additional screen damping ≥ 10 dB. This is usually achieved by installation in enclosed and
grounded control cabinets made of metal.
Grounding • Ground all metallically conductive components (controller, mains filter, motor filter, mains choke) using suitable cables connected to a
central point (PE bar).
• Maintain the minimum cross-sections prescribed in the safety regulations:
– For the EMC, not the cable cross-section is important, but the surface and the contact with a cross-section as large as possible, i.e. large
surface.

4-34 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F1 ... F3

K1
OFF

Z1
K1
PES PES ON
PES

PES
F4 F5
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG -UG +UG PE T1 T2
K1

932X - 933X
RB

9351
U V W PE X7 1 2 3 4 7 7 62 63 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59 Z2
PES PES PES PES

PES
-X1 K1
+ +
PES RFR

PE M PE
3~ R
K35.0124

Fig. 4-17 Example for wiring in accordance with EMC regulations


F1...F5 Protection, see “Cable protection” ( ^ 3-6 ) / “Mains connection” ( ^ 4-13 )
K1 Mains contactor
Z1 For mains filter “A” or “B” see Accessories.
Z2 Brake mode, see Accessories.
-X1 Terminal strip in control cabinet
PES HF screening by connection to PE with a surface as large as possible (see ”Shielding”) ^ 4-34 )

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 4-35


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4-36 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5 Commissioning

5.1 Initial switch-on

Stop!
Prior to initial switch-on of the controller, check the wiring for completeness, short-circuit, and earth
fault:
• Power connection:
– Supply via terminals L1, L2 and L3 (direct mains connection) or alternatively via terminals
+UG, -UG (DC bus connection, network of drives)
• Motor connection:
– In-phase connection to the motor (direction of rotation)
• Feedback system (resolver, incremental encoder, ...)
• Control terminals:
– Controller enable: terminal X5/28 (reference potential: X5/39)
– Direction of rotation terminal X5/E1 or X5/E2
(reference potential: X5/39)
– With external setpoint selection: terminals X6/1, X6/2
(reference potential: X6/7)
• Covering the power connections:
– Put on cover(s) and fix.
• Keep to the switch-on sequence!

Note!
• All specifications of the parameterization refer to the application example ”Speed control” in
Chapter 11.2.1.
• Use the convenient short set-up menus for the commissioning with the operating module
9371 BB or the PC and the Global Drive Control or LEMOC2 in which the codes for the most
important settings are summarized (see also Chapter 7.1.2).

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.1.1 Switch-on sequence


1. X5/28 (controller enable) must be open (LOW).
2. X5/E4 to HIGH signal (+13 V ... +30 V)
3. Switch on mains:
– The controller is ready for operation after approx. 0.5 s
(2 s for drives with sin/cos encoders with serial interface).
4. Adapt controller to the operating conditions under C0173:
– If the controllers are not adapted, their lives are reduced.
C0173 Mains voltage upper switch-off threshold Operation
0 < 400 V
1 (default setting) 400 V with or without brake unit
770 V
2 400 V < UMains ≤ 460 V
3 480 V without brake unit
4 480 V 800 V with brake unit

5. Enter motor data:


– For drives with Lenze motor: select motor under C0086.
– For drives with other motors: see Chapter 5.2.
6. Select feedback system:
– Drives with resolver: no changes required.
– Drives with other feedback systems:
Select feedback system under C0025.
Set encoders voltage under C0421.
(Menu: ”Motor / Feedb.”, submenu: ”Feedback” or
menu: ”Motor/Feedback system”, submenu: ”Feedback systems”)
– For sensorless speed control (SSC): C0025 = 1. do not use this control for new applications
(see chapter 4.2.10).
7. When the digital terminals X5 are supplied with internal voltage:
– Assign output X5/A1 with ”FIXED1”. Terminal X5/A1 supplies approx. 24 V (see Chapters
4.2.8.2 and 5.7.2)
8. When the analog terminals X6 are supplied with internal voltage:
– Assign output X6/63 (FB AOUT) to ”FIXED100% ”. The output on terminal X6/63 is 10V.

Note!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined configurations in C0005.C0005 = XX1X (e.g.
1010 = speed control via terminals) automatically assigns the output X5/A1 to FIXED1.

9. Set the maximum speed under C0011.


10.Select a direction of rotation (see Chapter 5.4):
- CW rotation: HIGH signal at X5/E1 (+13 V ... +30 V)
- CCW rotation: HIGH signal at X5/E2 (+13 V ... +30 V)

5-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

11.Apply setpoint:
– Apply a voltage > 0 V (max. 10 V) at X6/1, X6/2.
– Do not activate a JOG setpoint (X5/E3 LOW).
12.Check whether the controller is ready for operation:
– When the green LED is flashing:
Controller is ready for operation, continue with 13.
– When green LED is dark and red LED is flashing:
There is a fault. Before proceeding with the commissioning, eliminate the fault (see chapter
9 ”Troubleshooting and fault elimination”).
13.Enable controller (see Chapter 5.3):
– The green LED is illuminated if a HIGH signal is applied at X5/28 (+13 V ... +30 V) and no
other source of controller inhibit is active.
14.For operation with a fieldbus module, additional settings are necessary
(see Operating Instructions for the fieldbus module used).
The motor will now rotate with the setpoint speed and the selected direction of rotation.

Troubleshooting:
Error Cause / remedy
Feedback system • Motor rotates CCW when viewed to the motor shaft Feedback system is not connected in-phase
• C0060 counts down after controller enable • Connect feedback system in-phase
Asynchronous motor Motor
• rotates at Imax and half slip frequency
• does not react on setpoint changes Motor is not connected in-phase
• Connect motor in-phase
in phase at the terminals U,
U V,
VW
Synchronous motor • Motor does not follow the setpoint change
• Imax follows the setpoint in idle running
• Motor rotates CCW when viewed to the motor shaft. The rotor angle (offset of electrical and mechanical
rotor angle) is not correct
• Make a rotor position adjustment (C0095 = 1). For
this, operate the motor without load.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.2 Input of the motor data


To achieve an optimum speed-torque behaviour of the drive, it is necessary to enter the nameplate
data of the connected motor.
• If a LENZE motor is used:
– Select the motor type under C0086 (see Chapter 11.3; Code table or Chapter 11.5; Motor
selection list). The controller sets all other motor data automatically.
– To achieve outstanding accuracy you can enter the eight-digit designation of the motor
nameplate ”Geber” (encoder”) under C0416 when using motors with resolvers (optional).
• If the motor type is not listed under C0086, select a similar Lenze motor under C0088 C0086
(see Chapter 11.3; Code table or Chapter 11.5; Motor selection list). You have to change the
following motor data manually:
– C0006: Operating mode of the motor control
– C0022: Adapt Imax to the maximum motor current
– C0081: Rated motor power
– C0087: Rated motor speed
– C0088: Rated motor current
– C0089: Rated motor frequency
– C0090: Rated motor voltage
– C0091: Motor-cos ϕ
– User-specific detection of the motor temperature (see Chapter 4.2.9)
Only for very high requirements to the control features:
– C0084: Stator resistance of the motor
– C0085: Leakage inductance of the motor

Note!
• All required inputs are contained in the menu ”Motor/feedb.”(Motor/feedback system”).
• If you select a motor type under C0086 and change one of the above listed motor data
subsequently, C0086 = o (COMMON) is set (i.e. no Lenze motor is used).
• Do not operate reluctance motors.

5-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.2.1 Operation with synchronous motors made by other manufacturers

Note!
If you use a Lenze synchronous motor with encoder feedback, you may skip this chapter.

Stop!
Please use single pole resolvers and single-turn or multi-turn sin/cos encoders only.

5.2.1.1 Rotor position adjustment


The rotor position must be adjusted, if:
• a motor other than from Lenze is used
• another encoder is mounted to the motor later (motor from another manufacturer but also
Lenze motors)
• a defective encoder has been replaced

The following steps are required:


1. Check the resolver poling
2. Optimise the current controller

Resolver poling
Please open the menu ’Motor settings’ from the GDC parameter menu and there the submenu
’Motor/feedback systems’ (see Fig. 5-1).

9300std200

Fig. 5-1 Parameter menu (GDC) for motor setting

Code C0060 indicates the rotational angle of a revolution as a numerical value between 0 ... 2047.
– This value must go up when the rotor rotates in CW direction (when looking at the front of
the motor shaft)!
– Exchange the connections Sin+ and Sin- if the values are going down.
(Connections shown in chapter 4.2.10 (^ 4-30) ).

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Optimise the current controller


Preparations
• Go to the submenu of the code list (GDC) to code C0292 (SSC IM - setpoint) and enter the
rated current of your drive
• Set the feedback of the drive to ’1’ under C0025 (i.e. drive without feedback)
• The current controller is adjusted under codes C0075 (Vp ) and C0076 (Tr). For this, call the
parameter menu in Fig. 5-2.

9300std202

Fig. 5-2 Parameter menu for current controller adjustment

• Lay a motor phase to the current probe connected to an oscilloscope.


• Storage oscilloscope settings:
– Time basis: 200 or 500 µs/div
– Auto trigger
• Select minimum speed setpoint at the controller
Optimisation of current controller:
• Enable the controller until the current indicated on the oscilloscope reaches its maximum
value.
• Inhibit the controller and switch to quick stop.
• Select the trigger mode for the oscilloscope
• Enable the controller for a short time
• Observe the transient response at the oscilloscope. Use C0075 and C0076 to adapt it as
shown in Fig. 5-3.

9300std201

Fig. 5-3 Oscillograph of an optimised current controller

5-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Stop!
After the optimisation has been completed, the original values must be re-entered under C0292 and
C0025.

Rotor adjustment
1. Inhibit controller (e.g. with terminal X5/28 = LOW)
2. Unload motor mechanically (separate motor from gearbox or machine).

9300std203

Fig. 5-4 Rotor position adjustment in GDC

3. Activation of the position adjustment with C0095 = 1 (GDC, see Fig. 5-4)
4. Enable controller again
• The position adjustment program of the controller is started.
– The rotor rotates a full revolution in several steps.
– C0095 is reset to ’0’ after one revolution
• The rotor angle is indicated under C0058 (see Fig. 5-4).
Restriction for Sin/Cos encoders: C0058 always ’0’, since the value is stored in the encoder.

Note!
Codes C0095 and C0058 are only displayed in GDC, if the bar cursor is positioned on them and the
code is read using [F6].

5. Inhibit controller again


6. Please save the data calculated by the controller with C0003 in the parameter set wanted.
7. Switch-off the mains and, if necessary, mount the motor to the machine again.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.3 Controller enable


• The controller is enabled only after all sources of controller inhibit have been reset (series
connection of all sources).
– When the controller is enabled, the green LED on the controller is illuminated.
• The active sources of the controller inhibit are displayed under C0183 (see also menu:
Diagnostic; Actual info.
The following table shows the conditions for controller enable:
Source controller inhibit Controller inhibited Controller enabled Note
Terminal X5/28 0 V ... + 4 V + 13 V ... + 30 V -
Keypad STOP key RUN key Inhibit with the STOP key is possible
only if the STOP key is assigned with
”CINH” under C0469.
Error In case of TRIP TRIP reset For check see chapter 9
In case of Message
System bus Transmission of the control information Transmission of the control information see Manual
INHIBIT via C0135 ENABLE via C0135
Fieldbus module See Operating Instructions of the corresponding fieldbus module -

Note!
All sources act like a series connection of switches which are independent of each other.

5.4 Input of the direction of rotation


Based on the factory setting, the motor direction of rotation depends on
• the sign of the speed setpoint (link of main and additional setpoint).
• the triggering of the digital inputs X5/E1 and X5/E2.

5-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.5 Quick stop


Using the quick stop function (QSP), you can stop the drive for a time to be set, independently of
the setpoint input.
In the factory setting, the quick stop function is active:
• If, during mains connection
– X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = HIGH or
– X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = LOW
• If, during operation
– X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = LOW
QSP is recognized by the controller if a LOW signal is applied at X5/E1 and X5/E2 for more
than approx. 2 ms.

Function:
• The speed decelerates to zero according to the set deceleration time under C0105 (factory
setting = 0 s). The drive stop driftfree.
• The drive accelerates to its setpoint along the set ramps if one of the inputs is triggered with a
HIGH level.
– If the speed was not zero, the controller synchronizes to the actual speed.

5.6 Change of the internal control structure


The internal control structure is adapted to the application (e.g. speed control, torque control, phase
control, ...) via code C0005 (see chapter 11.3). For this, the controller must first be inhibited.

Stop!
When the internal control structure is changed, another terminal assignment may result.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-9


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.7 Change of the terminal assignment


(see also Chapter 8.3 ”Working with function blocks”)
If the configuration is changed via C0005, the assignment of all inputs and outputs will be overwritten
with the corresponding basic assignment. If necessary, the function assignment must be adapted
to the wiring.

Note!
Use the menu ”Terminal I/O” for the keypad 9371BB or the menu ”Terminal I/O” for Global Drive
Control or LEMOC2.

Stop!
To reassign an input, the signal source assigned before will not be overwritten! Remove unwanted
active links (see Chapter 8.3.3).

5.7.1 Freely assignable digital inputs


Five freely assignable digital inputs are available (X5/E1 ... X5/E5). It is possible to determine the
polarity for each input, i.e. the input is HIGH active or LOW active.

Change assignment:

Note!
Use the submenu ”DIGIN” for the keypad 9371BB or the submenu ”Digital inputs” for Global Drive
Control or LEMOC2.

5-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Example:
Menu ”Terminal I/ O; DIGIN” (terminal-I/ O; digital inputs)
Here are the most important aims for digital inputs
Valid for the basic configuration C0005 = 1000.
Code controlled by Note
CFG Subcode Signal name Signal (interface) Selection list 2
C0885 000 R/L/Q-R DIGIN1 (Term. X5/E1) 0051 HIGH = do not invert main setpoint (CW rotation)
C0886 000 R/L/Q-L DIGIN2 (Term. X5/E2) 0052 HIGH = Invert main setpoint (CCW rotation)
C0787 001 NSET-JOG*1 DIGIN3 (Term. X5/E3) 0053 HIGH = Main setpoint
p is substituted byy the fixed speed
p from
002 NSET-JOG*2 FIXED0 - 1000 C0039/
C0039/x
The signals are binary coded.
coded
003 NSET-JOG*4 FIXED0 - 1000
004 NSET-JOG*8 FIXED0 - 1000
C0788 001 NSET-TI*1 FIXED0 - 1000 Additional acceleration and deceleration times from C0101/x
002 NSET-TI*2 FIXED0 - 1000 and
d C0103/
C0103/x
The signals are binary coded.
coded
003 NSET-TI*4 FIXED0 - 1000
004 NSET-TI*8 FIXED0 - 1000
C0880 001 DCTRL-PAR*1 FIXED0 - 1000 Parameter set selection:
002 DCTRL-PAR*2 FIXED0 - 1000 The signals are binary coded (see C
Chapter 7.2.4)
C0881 000 DCTRL-PAR-LOAD FIXED0 - 1000 Signal LOW-HIGH loads selected parameter set with
DCTRL-PAR*x
C0871 000 DCTRL-TRIP-SET DIGIN4 (Term. X5/E4) 0054 LOW = Controller sets TRIP (EEr)
C0876 - DCTRL-TRIP-RES DIGIN5 (Term. X5/E5) 0055 Signal LOW-HIGH = Resets active trip
C0920 000 REF-ON FIXED0 - 1000 HIGH = Start homing
C0921 000 REF-MARK FIXED0 - 1000 LOW-HIGH edge = stop homing

1. Select the input of the function blocks which is to be assigned to a new source under the
configuration code CFG in the code level.
– Example:
C0787/2 (CFG/subcode) determines the source for the input ”NSET-JOG*2” (signal name)
in the function block ”Speed setpoint conditioning” (NSET).
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG.Select the source (signal) from the indicated list.
Please consider: Where does the signal for the control of this input come from?
– Example:
”NSET-JOG*2” is to be controlled by terminal X5/E5 (interface).
– For this, select DIGIN5 (signal) and acknowledge with SHIFT + PRG.
3. Change to the code level by 2 * PRG.
4. Determine the polarity of the input terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5 (HIGH active or LOW active)
under code C0114 and subcode.
– In the code level the terminal is selected via subcode.
– Change to the parameter level using PRG and select the polarity.
– Change to the code level by 2 * PRG.
5. Repeat steps 1. to 4. until all inputs required are assigned.
6. Remove unwanted connections (see chapter 8.3.3). The previous connection of terminal
X5/E5 will not be removed automatically. Removal of the connection:
– Select C0876 in the code level (previous target of terminal X5/E5)
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select FIXED0 (signal) and acknowledge with SHIFT+PRG.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 5-11


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.7.2 Freely assignable digital outputs


Four freely assignable digital outputs are available (X5/A1 ... X5/A4). It is possible to determine the
polarity for each input, i.e. the input is HIGH active or LOW active.
The most important codes are listed in the submenu: DIGOUT (digital outputs)

Change assignment:
1. Select the output which is to be assigned to another function via the subcode under C0117.
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG.Select the signal from the list which is to be output
via the selected output terminal. Change to the code level using PRG.
3. Determine the polarity (HIGH active or LOW active) via the subcode of the output under
C0118.
4. Repeat step 1. to 3., until all outputs desired are assigned.

5.7.3 Freely assignable analog inputs


The most important codes are indicated in the submenu: AIN1 X6.1/2 or AIN2 X6.3/4 (analog input
1 (X6.1/2) or analog input 2 (X6.3/4))

Change assignment:
1. Select the input of the function block to be assigned to a new source in the code level.
– Example
Determine the source for the input ”Main setpoint” (NSET-N) in the function block ”Speed
setpoint conditioning” (NSET) under C0780.
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG.Select the signal from the list which is to be used
as source for the selected input.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. until all inputs required are assigned.
4. Remove unwanted links (see Chapter 8.3.3).

5.7.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs


Use the monitor outputs X6/62 and X6/63 to output internal signals as voltage signals.
Under C0108 and C0109 the outputs can be adapted to e.g. a measuring device or a slave drive.
The most important codes are indicated in the submenu: AOUT1 X6.62 or AIN2 X6.63 (analog output
1 (X6.62) or analog output 1 (X6.63))

Change assignment:
1. Select the output to be assigned to another signal (source) (e. g. C0431 for output X6/62) in
the code level.
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG. Select the signal from the list which is to be output
via the monitor output.
3. If necessary, adjust an offset in the hardware under C0109
4. If necessary, the signal gain can be adapted to the hardware under C0108.
5. Repeat steps 1. to 4. to assign the second output.

5-12 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6 During operation

6.1 Status indications

6.1.1 In Global Drive Control

1. Click on the ”Control” button in the ”Basic settings” dialog box.


2. Click on the ”Diagnostics” button in the ”Control” dialog box.

1 11
2 12
3
4 13
5
6
14
7
8
9 15

10

Fig. 6-1 Dialog box ”Diagnostics 9300”


1 Type of fault
2 Actual speed
3 Actual motor voltage
4 Actual motor current
5 Motor torque
6 DC-bus voltage
7 Heatsink temperature
8 Motor temperature
9 Controller load
10 Reset fault
11 Time when the supply voltage was applied
12 Time when the controller was enabled
13 Actual fault with time and frequency of the fault. ^ 9-3
14 Fault history with time and frequency of the fault. ^ 9-3
15 Reset history buffer. ^ 9-4

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 6-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6.2 Information on operation


When operating the controller, please observe the following notes:

Stop!
• Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage at L1, L2, L3 or +UG,
-UG may overload the internal input current load:
– Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.

• During mains switching (L1,L2,L3) it is not important whether further controllers are supplied
via the DC bus.

6.2.1 Switching on the motor side


• Switching on the motor side of the inverter is permissible for emergency switch-off.
• Please note:
– Switching while a controller is enabled may cause the fault indication ”0Cx”
(short-circuit/earth fault in operating case x).
– For long motor cables and operation of controllers with smaller output power, leakage
currents through interfering cable capacitances may cause the fault indication ”OCx”.
– Switching equipment on the motor side must be dimensioned for DC voltages
(UDC max = 800 V).

6-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6.2.2 Controller protection by current derating


Valid for the types 9326 to 9332.
For field frequencies < 5 Hz the controller automatically derates the maximum permissible output
current.
• For operation with chopping frequency = 8 kHz (C0018=1, optimum power):
– The current is derated, depending on the heat sink temperature (see Fig. 6-2).
• For operation with chopping frequency = 16 kHz (C0018=2, optimum noise):
– The current is always derated to Ir16 = I016.
• For operation with automatic change-over of the chopping frequency (C0018=0):
– Below the threshold, the controller operates with 16 kHz (optimum noise). The function of
the current derating follows the characteristic ”Imax 16 kHz” (see Fig. 6-2).
– If a higher torque is required from the machine for example for acceleration, the controller
automatically switches to 8 kHz (optimum power). The function of the current derating
follows the characteristic ”Imax 8 kHz” (see Fig. 6-2).

IM o to r
I0 x

J < 4 0 ° C 1 .5 * Ir8 = Im a t 8 k H z
1 .5 * I0
K a x
8

C
6 0 °
J K =
1 .2 5 * I0 8
C
0 °
> 8 1 .5 * Ir8 = Im a t 1 6 k H z
J K a x

I0 8

Ir1 6 = c h a n g e o v e r to 8 k H z
I0 1 6 a t C 0 0 1 8 = 0

0 5 |fd| [H z ] K35.0129

Fig. 6-2 Current derating function of the controllers 9326 to 9332.


ϑK Heat sink temperature
Irx Rated current at U, V, W depending on the chopping frequency
fd Field frequency at the output U, V, W
I0x max. standstill current for field frequency = 0 Hz

See chapter “Rated data”. ( ^ 3-3 )

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 6-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7 Parameter setting
• The parameter setting of the controller is used to adapt the drive to your applications.
• The complete parameter set is organised in codes which are consecutively numbered and
begin with ”C”.
(see code table, chapter 11.3).
• You can save the parameter set of an application.
– Four parameter sets are available so that the controller can be adjusted rapidly from one
application to another.
– When delivered, the parameter sets are factory-set.

7.1 Ways of parameter setting


There are two ways of changing parameters:
• Using the keypad
• Using a superimposed host (PC or PLC) via fieldbus modules and operating programs (see
accessories chapter 11.1).
In these Operating Instructions, only the change of parameters using the keypad is described.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.1.1 Structure of a parameter set


To simplify operation, the keypad 9371BB and the PC programs GLOBAL DRIVE CONTROL and
LEMOC2 consist of menu levels which will guide you rapidly to the desired codes:
• Main menu
– contains submenus
– contains the complete code list
• Submenus
– contain the codes which are assigned to them
Codes consist of:
• Code level
– Codes without subcodes contain one parameter
– Codes with subcodes contain several parameters
• Parameter level/operating level
There are 4 different parameter types:
– Absolute values of a physical variable
(e. g. 400 V, 10 s)
– Relative values of unit variables
(e. g. 50 % setpoint)
– Numbers for certain states
(e. g. 0 = controller inhibited, 1 = controller enabled)
– Display values
These values can only be displayed but not changed.
(E. g. act. value of the motor current under C0054)
You can modify absolute and relative values in discrete steps.

7-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.1.2 List of selection menus


Keypad 9371 BB Global Drive Control or LEMOC2
Main menu Submenu Main menu Submenu
USER menu USER menu
Code list Code list
Load / Store Parameter set management
Diagnostic Diagnostics
Actual info Momentary operation
History History
Short setup Short setup
Speed mode Speed mode
Torque mode Torque mode
DF master Digital frequency master
DF slave bus Digital frequency slave bus
DF slave cas Digital frequency slave cascade
UserMenue CFG Configuration User Menu
Main FB Main function blocks
NSET NSET: Speed preparation
NSET-JOG NSET-JOG: JOG values
NSET-RAMP1 NSET-RAMP1: Standard RFG
MCTRL MCTRL: Motor control
DFSET DFSET: Digital frequency processing
DCTRL DCTRL: Device control
Terminal I/O Terminal I/O
AIN1 X6.1/2 Analog input 1 X6.1/2
AIN2 X6.3/4 Analog input 2 X6.3/4
AOUT1 X6 62 Analog output 1 X6/62
AOUT2 X6 63 Analog output 2 X6/63
DIGIN Digital inputs
DIGOUT Digital outputs
DFIN Digital frequency input
DFOUT Digital frequency output
State bus State bus
Controller Controller setting
Speed Speed
Current Current/Torque
Phase Phase
Motor/Feedb. Motor/Feedback system
Motor adj Motor adjustment
Feedback Feedback systems
Monitoring Monitoring

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Keypad 9371 BB Global Drive Control or LEMOC2


Main menu Submenu Main menu Submenu
LECOM/AIF LECOM/AIF interface
LECOM-A/B LECOM-A/B
AIF interface AIF-data interface
Status word Status word
System bus System bus
Management CAN management
CAN-IN1 CAN-IN1 Input block 1
CAN-OUT1 CAN-OUT1 Output block 1
CAN-IN2 CAN-IN2 Input block 2
CAN-OUT2 CAN-OUT2 Output block 2
CAN-IN3 CAN-IN3 Input block 3
CAN-OUT3 CAN-OUT3 Output block 3
Status word Status word
FDO FDO: Free digital outputs
Diagnostic Diagnostics
FB config FB configuration
Func. blocks Function blocks
ABS ABS: Absolute value
ADD ADD Addition
AIF-OUT AIF-OUT Data interface
AIN1 AIN1 Analog input1 (term. 1/2
AIN2 AIN2 Analog input2 (term. 3/4
AND1 AND1 Logic AND
AND2 AND2 Logic AND
AND3 AND3 Logic AND
AND4 AND4 Logic AND
AND5 AND5 Logic AND
AND6 AND6 Logic AND
AND7 AND6 Logic AND
ANEG1 ANEG1 Analog NOT
ANEG2 ANEG2 Analog NOT
AOUT1 AOUT1 Analog output term. 62
AOUT2 AOUT2 Analog output term. 63
ARIT1 ARIT1 Arithmetics
ARIT2 ARIT2 Arithmetics
ARITPH1 ARITPH1 32 Bit Arithmetics
ASW1 ASW1 Analog switch
ASW2 ASW2 Analog switch
ASW3 ASW3 Analog switch
ASW4 ASW4 Analog switch
BRK BRK Brake logic
CAN-OUT1 CAN-OUT1 Output block 1
CAN-OUT2 CAN-OUT2 Output block 2
CAN-OUT3 CAN-OUT3 Output block 3
CONV2 CONV2 Converter

7-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Keypad 9371 BB Global Drive Control or LEMOC2


Main menu Submenu Main menu Submenu
CFG-FB CFG FB configuration
CMP1 CMP1 Analog comparator
CMP2 CMP2 Analog comparator
CMP3 CMP3 Analog comparator
CONV1 CONV1 Converter
CONV3 CONV3 Converter
CONV4 CONV4 Converter
CONV5 CONV5 Converter
CONV6 CONV6 Converter
CONVPHA1 CONVPHA1 32-bit converter
CONVPHPH1 CONVPHPH1 32-bit converter
CONVPP1 CONVPP1 32-bit / 16-bit converter
DB DB Analog dead band
DCTRL DCTRL Device control
DFIN DFIN Digital frequency input
DFOUT DFOUT Digital frequency output
DFRFG DFRFG Digital frequency ramp generator
DFSET DFSET Digital frequency processing
DIGDEL1 DIGDEL1 Digital delay
DIGDEL2 DIGDEL2 Digital delay
DIGIN DIGIN Digital input E1 - E5
DIGOUT DIGOUT Digital output A1 - A4
DT1 DT1 Differential element
FCNT1 FCNT1 Piece counter
FDO FDO Free digital outputs
FEVAN1 FEVAN1 Free analog input variable
FEVAN2 FEVAN2 Free analog input variable
FIXSET FIXSET Fixed setpoints
FLIP1 FLIP1 Flipflop
FLIP2 FLIP2 Flipflop
LIM LIM Limiter
GEARCOMP GEARCOMP Gearbox torsion
MCTRL MCTRL Motor control
MFAIL MFAIL Mains failure detection
MPOT MPOT Motor potentiometer
NOT1 NOT1 Logic NOT
NOT2 NOT2 Logic NOT
NOT3 NOT3 Logic NOT
NOT4 NOT4 Logic NOT
NOT5 NOT5 Logic NOT
NSET NSET Speed preparation
NSET-JOG NSET-JOG JOG values
NSET-RAMP1 NSET-RAMP1 Standard RFG
OR1 OR1 Logic OR
OR2 OR2 Logic OR
OR3 OR3 Logic OR
OR4 OR4 Logic OR
OR5 OR5 Logic OR

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Keypad 9371 BB Global Drive Control or LEMOC2


Main menu Submenu Main menu Submenu
PCTRL PCTRL Process controller
PHADD1 PHADD1 32-bit adding element
PHCMP1 PHCMP1 Phase comparator
PHCMP2 PHCMP2 Phase comparator
PHCMP3 PHCMP3 Phase comparator
PHDIFF1 PHDIFF1 32 bit setpoint/act. value comparison
PHDIV1 PHDIV1 Phase division
PHINT1 PHINT1 Phase integrator
PHINT2 PHINT2 Phase integrator
PHINT3 PHINT3 Phase integrator
PT1 PT1 Delay element
CW/CCW/Q CW/CCW/Q CW-CCW-QSP
REF REF Homing
RFG RFG Ramp function generator
SRFG1 SRFG1 S-shape ramp function generator
STORE1 STORE1 Saving phase, E5
STORE2 STORE2 Saving phase, E4
SYNC1 SYNC1 Control program synchronization
TRANS1 TRANS1 Signal evaluation
TRANS2 TRANS2 Signal evaluation
TRANS3 TRANS3 Signal evaluation
TRANS4 TRANS4 Signal evaluation
FCODE Free codes
Identify Identification
Drive Controller
Op Keypad LECOM

7-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2 Parameter setting using the keypad

7.2.1 Keypad
(Order no.: EMZ9371BB)
The keypad can also be plugged into the X1 interface and removed during operation.
When the keypad is plugged into the controller, the module is initialized. The keypad is ready to
operate after ”GLOBAL DRIVE READY” has been displayed.

Front view

Global DRIVE

RDY IMP Imax Mmax Fail

SH PRG
Para
0051 00
1250 rpm
MCTRL-NACT

Fig. 7-1 Keypad

LCD display

Status indications RDY IMP Imax Mmax Fail


Code number
Way of parameter SH PRG
acceptance 0051
Para
00 Subcode number
Active level;
here: parameter level 1250 rpm Parameter

Cursor
MCTRL-NACT Text

Fig. 7-2 LCD display of the keypad

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Segments and status indications of the LCD display:


Segment Explanation
Code number Four-digit code number
Subcode number Two-digit subcode number
Parameter Parameter value with max. twelve digits
Text Help text with max. 13 digits;
In operating level: status information of C0183 or contents of C0004
SH PRG SH PRG : Parameter is only accepted with SHIFT + PRG (OFFLINE)
SH PRG: Parameter is accepted only with SHIFT + PRG during controller inhibit (OFFLINE)
: Parameter is directly accepted by controller (ONLINE)
Empty: Parameter cannot be changed
Active level Menu = menu level, Code = code level, Para = parameter level, no display = operating level

Status indications of the keypad


Display on off
RDY Ready for operation Initializing or fault
IMP Power outputs inhibited Power outputs enabled
FAIL Active fault No fault
IMAX Motor current setpoint ≥ C0022 Motor current setpoint < C0022
MMAX Speed controller 1 in its limitation Drive speed-controlled
Drive torque-controlled.

Key functions
”SHIFT + ” means:
1. Press the SHIFT key with one finger and keep it pressed.
2. Press the second key indicated with another finger.
Keys
y Function
Menu level Code level Parameter level/operating level
PRG - change between code, parameter and operating level
SHIFT + PRG - - accept parameters (depending on the
parameter and menu)
_ next higher menu item next higher code number increase displayed number
SHIFT + _ next higher menu item fast increase code number fast increase displayed number fast
` next lower menu item next lower code number decrease displayed number
SHIFT + ` next lower menu item fast decrease code number fast decrease displayed number fast
] next higher menu level go to the menu level cursor to the left
[ next lower menu level (submenus) or code - cursor to the right
level
RUN cancel function of the STOP key
STOP Inhibit controller: quick stop, controller inhibit or switched off C0469
Trip reset: when a trip has occurred and the STOP key is pressed (independently of C0469). Then, press RUN.
The LED in the key shows the status of the STOP key:
• LED on: STOP key pressed
• LED off: RUN key pressed

7-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Operating level
From the parameter level, you reach the operating level by pressing PRG.
• In the operating level, additional status information or the additional display value specified
under C0004 is displayed (presetting: actual speed C0051).
– When selecting the USER menu, the first code level of the USER menu is displayed in the
first line.
• Additional information is displayed according to the following priority list:
Priority Display Meaning
1 GLOBAL DRIVE INIT Initializing or communication error between keypad and controller
2 XXX - TRIP active TRIP (contents of C0168/1)
3 XXX - MESSAGE active message (contents of C0168/1)
4 Special controller states:
Switch-on inhibit
5 Source for controller inhibit (the value of C0004 is displayed at the same time):
STP1 Terminal X5/28
STP3 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
STP4 InterBus-S or Profibus
STP5 System bus (CAN)
STP6 C0040
6 Source of quick stop:
QSP-term-Ext HIGH signal is applied at input MCTRL-QSP on the function block MCTRL
(in factory setting applied to terminals X5/E1 and X5/E2)
QSP-C0135 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
QSP-AIF InterBus-S or Profibus
QSP-CAN System bus (CAN)
7 XXX - WARNING Active warning (contents of C0168/1)
8 xxxx Value under C0004

User menu
In some applications, specific codes must be changed often.
You can therefore establish a menu with max. 32 codes which you use frequently under C0517.
• The number before the comma is the code number.
• The number after the comma is the subcode.
• Code-subcode combinations are allowed only once.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-9


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2.2 Change parameters

Tip!
The parameter set changed must be saved, if you do not want to loose the modifications after mains
disconnection (see chapter 7.2.3).

Basic procedure
1. Change to the code level from the menus using the arrow keys ?, +, * or  change to the
code level. ”Code” is displayed.
2. With ? or + select code or subcode.
3. Change to the parameter level using PRG.”Para” is displayed.
4. With * or  move the cursor (small, black bar) under the number to be changed.
5. With ? or + change number.
6. Repeat 4. and 5. to change other numbers, if ncessary.
7. Accept parameters. The way the controller accepts the modified parameters is shown in the
LCD display in front of the parameter:
Display in front of the parameter Controller uses the new value
Immediately during the change
SH+ PRG After pressing SH+ PRG. Acknowledgement: ok in the display
SH+ PRG Press STOP to inhibit the controller.
Press SHIFT + PRG. Acknowledgement: ok in the display
Press RUN to enable the controller

8. Press PRG twice to go to the code level. ”Code” is displayed.

7-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2.3 Save parameter set


You have to save the modified parameters, if you do not want to loose them after mains
disconnection.
• You can establish up to four parameter sets, e.g. if you process different materials on a
machine or if this is required by different operating states (setup mode, ”stand-by”).
• If you need only one parameter set, save the modifications permanently under parameter set
1, since the controller automatically loads parameter set 1 after mains connection.

How to proceed
1. Change from the menus to the code level using the arrow keys.
”Code” is displayed.
2. With ? or + select C0003.
3. Change to the parameter level using PRG.
”Para” is displayed.
4. With ? or + set parameter to 1 (possible even when the drive is running).
Note: If the parameter set is to be saved under another number, select 2, 3, or 4 instead of 1.
5. Press SHIFT + PRG.
”OK” is displayed for approx. 1 s.
Now your settings are saved permanently under parameter set 1 (or 2, 3, 4).

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-11


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2.4 Load parameter set


(Only possible when the controller is inhibited)

Warning!
• When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is reinitialized and acts as if it was
connected to the mains:
– System configurations and terminal assignments may be changed.Ensure, that your wiring
and drive configuration correspond to the settings of the parameter set.
• Only use terminal X5/28 as a source for controller inhibit!Otherwise the drive may start
accidentally when changing to another parameter set.

Tip!
The RDY message is not displayed while the parameter set is loaded since the controller cannot
be operated then.

During mains connection


The controller automatically loads parameter set 1.

Via keypad
1. X5/28 = LOW
2. With ? or + select C0002.
3. Change to the parameter level using PRG.
4. With ? or + select the desired parameter set.
5. Press SHIFT + PRG.
”OK” is displayed. When ”OK” is no longer displayed, the loading is completed.
6. Enable controller with X5/28 = HIGH.

7-12 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Terminal control
You can change to other parameter sets via e.g. the digital inputs X5/E1 ... X5/E5.
After mains connection the controller reads parameter set 1 first. Then, the terminals are evaluated
and the desired parameter set is loaded. A LOW-HIGH edge at input DCTRL-PAR-LOAD (”Load
parameter set”) is not necessary in this case:
• One or two digital inputs must be assigned to ”Select parameter set” in every parameter set.
– Determine the source(s) for ”Select parameter set” under C0880. The signal names are:
DCTRL-PAR*1 and DCTRL-PAR*2.
• One digital input must be assigned to ”Load parameter set” in every parameter set:
– Determine the source for ”Load parameter set” under C0881.The signal name is:
DCTRL-PAR-LOAD.
• These inputs must have the same assignment in all parameter sets which you want to use.
• The controller reads the terminals assigned with ”Select parameter” as a binary code. The
input DCTRL-PAR*1 is the first input, the input DCTRL-PAR*2 is the second input (e.g. E1 =
first input, E2 = second input).
– The signal must be applied constantly at the terminals for at least 10 ms so that the
parameter set to be loaded is recognized correctly.
– Terminal signals to select parameter sets:
1st input (DCTRL-PAR*1) 2nd input (DCTRL-PAR*2)
Parameter set 1 LOW LOW
Parameter set 2 HIGH LOW
Parameter set 3 LOW HIGH
Parameter set 4 HIGH HIGH

• A LOW-HIGH edge at the input ”Load parameter set” DCTRL-PAR-LOAD changes to the new
parameter set.
Procedure:
1. Trigger digital inputs, which are assigned to the function ”Select parameter set”.
2. Inhibit controller with X5/28 = LOW.
3. Trigger LOW-HIGH edge at the input ”Load parameter set”.
4. When the loading is completed:
– C0002 displays the number of the loaded parameter set.
– RDY is illuminated.
5. Enable controller with X5/28 = HIGH.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-13


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2.5 Parameter set transfer


(possible only when the controller is inhibited)

Warning!
During parameter set transfer, the control terminals of the 9300 servo can have undefined states!
Therefore, the plugs X5 and X6 must be removed before transfer. Thus, it is ensured that the
controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the defined state ”LOW”.

You can transfer complete parameter sets from one controller (e.g. controller 1) to another (e.g.
controller 2) using the keypad.
All parameter sets are copied from one controller to the operating unit and saved.

Procedure:
1. Plug keypad on controller 1.
2. Inhibit controller with X5/28 = LOW.
3. Save the last modifications in the corresponding parameter set under C0003.
4. Change from the menus to the code level using the arrow keys. ”Code” is displayed.
5. With ? or + select C0003.
6. Change to the parameter level using PRG. ”Para” is displayed.
7. Select parameter 11.
8. Press SHIFT + PRG.
RDY is no longer displayed. BUSY is displayed.
All parameter sets are copied to the keypad. Copying is completed when BUSY is no longer
displayed (after approx. one minute).

Stop!
Remove keypad only after BUSY is no longer displayed. Otherwise, TRIP ”PRX” will be activated.

9. Enable controller with X5/28 = HIGH.


10.Plug the keypad on controller 2.
11.Inhibit controller 2 with X5/28 = LOW.
12.Change from the menus to the code level using the arrow keys. ”Code” is displayed.
13.With ? or + select C0002.
14.Change to the parameter level using PRG.
”Para” is displayed.
15.Select parameter 20 to copy all parameter sets from the keypad to controller 2 and to save
them.
16.Press SHIFT + PRG.
RDY is no longer displayed. BUSY is displayed.
All parameter sets are copied to and saved in controller 2. Copying and saving are completed
when BUSY is no longer displayed.
17.Enable controller with X5/28 = HIGH.

7-14 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

Tip!
You can also copy individual parameter sets from the keypad to controller 2:
• For this, use the parameters 11, 12, 14 or 14 instead of parameter 20 in step 15., to copy the
parameter sets 1, 2, 3 or 4 to controller 2.
• You have to save the copied parameter sets if you do not want to loose the modifications
after mains disconnection (see chapter 7.2.3).

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 7-15


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting

7.2.6 Password protection


You can restrict the code access via the keypad using the password protection in C0094.
• Reading C0094 using the keypad:
– C0094 = 0: password protection is not activated.
– C0094 = 9999: password protection is activated.
• Activate password protection:
– Enter four-digit number in C0094.
– Confirm using SH + PRG.
• Deactivate password protection:
– Enter four-digit number again.
– All other inputs are refused.

Effect
• Working with the keypad:
– The codes of the USER menu can still be read and changed.
– All other codes are no longer displayed.
• Working with the fieldbus:
– It is possible to extend the protection under C0096/1 (AIF) and C0096/2 (CAN) when
working with a fieldbus.
Selection in C0096/X: 0 = No protection
1 = Read protection
2 = Write protection
3 = Read/write protection

7.3 Display functions

Actual value display


You can read different actual values using the following codes:
Code Meaning
C0051 Absolute actual speed [rpm]
C0052 Absolute motor voltage [V]
C0053 Absolute DC bus voltage [V]
C0054 Absolute motor current [A]
C0060 Rotor position [inc/rev]
C0061 Heatsink temperature [•C]
C0063 Absolute motor temperature [•C]
Display only with connected KTY (PTC) via X7 or X8
C0064 Controller load [%]

Identification
• You can read the software version of the controller under C0099.
• Under C0093 you can read the controller type.

7-16 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8 Configuration
Every practical application demands certain application-specific configurations (programs).
For this, function blocks are available which can be connected for the corresponding application.
The function blocks are linked via codes. (^ 8-4)

8.1 Predefined configurations


Basic configurations are already defined for standard applications of the controller. These basic
configurations can be selected via code C0005. The signal flow charts for the most important basic
configurations are listed in the appendix.

8.1.1 Working with predefined configurations


To adapt predefined configurations to your application, proceed as follows:
1. Select basic configuration under C0005.
2. Select operating mode under C0005. (^ 11-15)
3. Configure different signal flow charts, if necessary:
– Integrate or remove function blocks. (^ 8-4)
– Set parameters for function blocks. (^ 8-5)
– Change terminal configuration.

Note!
If the signal flow for the basic configuration is changed, e.g. by adding function blocks, C0005 is set
to ”0”. The message ”COMMON” is displayed.
If only the assignment of the control inputs and outputs is changed, C0005 remains the same. Under
code C0464 an identification is displayed.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.2 Operating modes


Determine the operating mode, the interface you want to use for parameter setting or control of the
controller, by choosing an operating module.

8.2.1 Parameter setting


Parameters can be set with one of the following modules:
• Communication module
– 2102 (LECOM A/B/LI)
– 2111 (INTERBUS)
– 2131 (PROFIBUS)
– 2133 (PROFIBUS)
• PC system bus module
– 2173

8.2.2 Control
Control via terminals (X5 and X6), via the fieldbus module at X1 or via the system bus (X4). Mixed
modes are also possible.

Note!
C0005 contains predefined configurations which allow a very easy change of the operating mode.

Example: C0005 = 1005


This configuration corresponds to a speed control with control via system bus (CAN).
If more inputs of the function blocks are to be controlled via an interface, proceed as follows:
• Assign the function block inputs to be controlled to ”control objects” depending on the
interface used (see Chapter 8.3.3):
– Free control codes
in case of control via LECOM A/B/LI (RS232, RS485 or optical fibre interface) or operating
module.
– AIF objects
in case of control using InterBus S or Profibus DP.
– CAN objects
in case of control using system bus.
• Then, the inputs can be controlled using these codes or input objects, by accessing them via
the interface.

8-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Example for a distribution of the control on terminals and RS232:


The main speed setpoint in the configuration C0005=1000 is to be controlled via LECOM A/B/LI. All
other inputs remain under terminal control.
1. Select C0780 via LECOM:
– C0780 is the configuration code for the main setpoint NSET-N in the function block ”Speed
setpoint conditioning” (NSET).
2. Assign a free control code via a selection number.
– e.g. 19515 (control code C0141)
The main speed setpoint is now controlled by C0141.

8.2.3 Configuration with Global Drive Control


With the PC program Global Drive Control (GDC) LENZE offers
• an easy to understand,
• well structured,
• convenient
tool for the configuration of your specific drive task.

Function block library


• GDC provides an easy-to-read library of available function blocks (FB).
• GDC also displays the complete assignment of a FB.

Signal configuration
The signal configuration is done with only one dialog box. It is a convenient way
• to display every FB as a block diagram.
• to see the assignment of all signal inputs at a glance.
• to enter the FB in the processing table.
• to print your signal configuration.

Terminal assignment
Freely assignable terminals can be configured using two dialog boxes:
• Dialog box - to link digital inputs and outputs.
• Dialog box - to link analog inputs and outputs.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.3 Working with function blocks


The signal flow of the controller can be configured by connecting function blocks. The controller can
thus be easily adapted to diverse applications.

8.3.1 Signal types


Every function block has inputs and outputs for connection with corresponding signal types for each
function:
• Quasi analog signals
– Symbol: H
– Unit: %
– Designation: a
– Value range: ± 16384 = ± 100%
– Resolution: 16 bit
• Digital signals
– Symbol: G
– Unit: binary, with HIGH or LOW level
– Designation: d
– Resolution: 1 bit
• Speed signals
– Symbol: F
– Unit: rpm
– Abbreviation: phd
– Resolution: 16 bit
• Phase signals
– Symbol: E
– Unit: inc
– Designation: ph
– Value range: 1 rev. = 65536 inc
– Resolution: 32 Bit
The signal type of the output and input must be the same for a proper connection. Thus, the analog
output signal of one function block can only be connected to the analog input signal of the other
function block. If two different signal types are connected, the connection will be rejected.

8-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.3.2 Elements of a function block

Parameterization code

Input name Name of the function block

C1100 FCNT1
FCNT1-CLKUP FCNT1-OUT
C1102/1
C1104/1
FCNT1-CLKDWN
C1102/2 Output symbol
C1104/2
CTRL FCNT1-EQUAL
Input symbol C1101/1 FCNT1-LD-VAL
C1103/1
FCNT1-LOAD
C1102/3
C1104/3

C1101/2 FCNT1-CMP-VAL
C1103/2

Configuration code
Function

Display code Output name

Fig. 8-1 Structure of an FB using the example of FCNT1

Name of the FB
Identifies the FB clearly. The name of the FB is followed by a number distinguishing the function of
the FB.
A selection number defines every FB. The input of the selection number into the processing table
is always required for the calculation of the FB. (^ 8-10) . The selection numbers are listed in selection
list 5. (^11-51) .
Example:
(FCNT1, see Fig. 8-1)
• FCNT1 ≡ selection number 6400 (selection list 5).

Input symbol
Designates the signal type which is allowed as a source for each input. (^ 8-4)

Tip!
Inputs which are not linked cannot be configured.

Name of the input


Consists of the FB name and a designation. The designations of the inputs are followed by a number
distinguishing the functions of the input.

Configuration code
Configures the input with a signal source (e.g. terminal signal, control code, output of a FB, ...). Inputs
with identical codes are distinguished by the attached subcode (Cxxxx/1). These codes are
configured by their subcodes.
It is not possible to connect one input with several signal sources.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Display code
Displays the current input value. Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the subcode.The
subcode is attached to the code (Cxxxx/1). These codes are displayed via their subcodes.
Display codes cannot be processed.
Function
Represents the mathematical function as a block diagram (see Fig. 8-1).
Parameterization code
Adaptation of the function or the behaviour to the application.The possible settings are explained
and shown in the text and/or the line diagram.
Output symbol
Designates the signal type. Connections with inputs of the same signal type are possible. (^ 8-4)
Every output is defined by a selection number. The selection numbers are divided into selection lists
(1 ... 4) according to the different signal types. (^11-51)
An output is linked to an input by the selection numbers.
Example:
(FCNT1, see Fig. 8-1)
• FCNT1-OUT ≡ selection number 6400 (analog signal, selection list 1).
• FCNT1-EQUAL≡selection number 6400 (digital signal, selection list 2).

Tip!
Outputs, which are not linked, cannot be configured.

Name of the output


Consists of the FB name and a designation. Outputs with the same function are distinguished by a
number behind their designation.

8.3.3 Connection of function blocks


General rules
• Assign a signal source to an input.
• One input can have only one signal source.
• Inputs of different function blocks can have the same signal source.
• Only the same types of signals can be connected. Thus, the analog output signal of one
function block can only be connected to the analog input of the other function block.

Stop!
Existing connections, which are not desired, must be removed by reconfiguration. Otherwise, the
drive cannot perform the desired function.

Tip!
Lenze offers a net-list generator for the visualization of existing connections (see accessories: PC
program GDC). (^ 11-1)

8-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

AND1-IN1 AND1 NOT1


C0820/1 NOT1-IN 1 NOT1-OUT
C0840
C0821/1
AND1-IN2 & C0841
AND1-OUT
C0820/2
NOT2
C0821/2 1
AND1-IN3 NOT2-IN NOT2-OUT
C0820/3 C0842
C0821/3 C0843

C0830/1
OR1-IN1 OR1 X C0720
C0721
DIGDEL1

C0831/1
OR1-IN2 |1 DIGDEL1-IN
OR1-OUT DIGDEL1-OUT
C0830/2 C0723
C0724 0 t
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
C0830/3
C0831/3

Possible connection
Connection not possible

Fig. 8-2 Correct connection of function blocks

Basic procedure
1. Select the configuration code of the function block input which is to be changed.
2. Determine the source of the input signal for the selected input
(e.g. from the output of another function block).
3. The function block input is assigned via a menu which contains only those signal sources
which are of the same type as the function block input to be assigned.
4. Select and confirm the signal source.
5. Remove undesired connections, if any.
– For this, select the corresponding signal assignment of the input via the configuration code
(e.g. FIXED 0, FIXED 1, FIXED 0% , ...).
6. Repeat 1. to 5. until the desired configuration is set.
7. Save modified configuration in the desired parameter set.

Example
• Condition:
– Factory setting
• Task:
– Square the analog signal of X6/3, X6/4 and output to X6/62.
• Solution:
– You need the function blocks AIN2, ARIT2 and AOUT2.

AIN2

á200%
3 AIN2-OUT ARIT2-IN1 C0600 ARIT2
+
C0601/1 C434/1 AOUT1
4 +
AIN2-OFFSET x
C0026/2 C0407
C0602/1
y + - * ARIT2-OUT
C0431
AOUT1-IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2-IN2
/ x/(1-y) AOUT1-GAIN +
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2-GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0409/2 AOUT1-OFFSET
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2

Fig. 8-3 Example of a simple configuration

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Create connections
1. Determine the signal source for ARIT2-IN1:
– Change to the code level using the arrow keys
? +
– Select C0601/1 using or .
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or +.
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
2. Determine signal source for ARIT2-IN2:
– Select C0601/2 using . ?
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or +.
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
3. Parameterise ARIT2:
– Select C0600 using .+
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select multiplication (selection number 3).
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
4. Determine signal source for AOUT1:
– Select C0431 using .+
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select output ARIT2-OUT (selection number 5505).
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
5. Enter function block ARIT2 in the processing table:
– Select C0465 and subcode 8 using . ?
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Enter function block ARIT2 (selection number 5505).
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
– The sequence of the FB processing is thus determined.

8-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Remove connections
• Since a source can have several targets, there may be some unwanted signal connections.
• Example:
– In the factory setting of the basic configuration C0005 = 1000 (speed control), ASW1-IN1
and AIN2-OUT are connected.
– This connection is not automatically removed by the settings described above! If you do not
want this connection, it must be removed.

C0812/1 ASW1
ASW1-IN1 0
C0810/1 ASW1-OUT
ASW1-IN2 1 NSET-NADD
FIXED0% C0810/2
C0812/2
ASW1-SET
FIXED0 C0811
C0813

AIN2
3 + AIN2-OUT
C0601/1
ARIT2-IN1 C0600
á200% ARIT2
C434/1 AOUT1
4 +
x
C0026/2 C0407
AIN2-OFFSET C0602/1
y + - * ARIT2-OUT
C0431
AOUT1-IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2-IN2
/ x/(1-y) AOUT1-GAIN +
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2-GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0409/2 AOUT1-OFFSET
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2

Fig. 8-4 Remove connections in a configuration

Now, the connection is removed.


6. Remove connection between ASW1-IN1 and AIN2-OUT:
– Select C0810/1 using or . ? +
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select the constant FIXED0% (selection number 1000) using ? or +.
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
7. Save new configuration, if desired:
– If you do not want to lose the modifications after mains disconnection, save the new signal
configuration under C0003 in one of the parameter sets.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-9


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.3.4 Entries into the processing table


The 93XX controller provides a certain time for calculating the processing time of FBs. Since the type
and number of FBs to be used depends on the application and can vary strongly, not all available
FBs are permanently calculated. A processing table is therefore provided under code C0465, where
only the FBs used are listed. This means that the drive system is perfectly matched to the task. If
further function blocks are integrated into an existing configuration, these must be listed in the
processing table.
Several aspects must be observed:

The number of FBs to be processed is limited


A maximum of 50 FBs can be integrated into a configuration. Every FB requires a certain processing
time. Code C0466 displays the residual time for the processing of FBs. If this time has elapsed no
further FBs can be integrated.

Entry sequence into the FBs


Normally, the entry sequence under C0465 is arbitrary, but it may be important for applications with
high response. In general, the most favourable sequence is adapted to the signal flow.
Example:

 AND1
DIGIN   
E1
E2   
& DIGOUT
E3   


  

  A1
E4  
  
 A2
E5   
  
 A3
 
   A4




 OR1
 

 ≥1 

 


  


 AND2


 & 




 


Fig. 8-5 Example of a configuration

Structure of the processing table for the configuration example Fig. 8-5:
1. DIGIN does not have to entered into the processing table
2. The first FB is AND1, since it receives its input signals from DIGIN and only has successors.
3. The second FB is OR1, since its signal source is the output of AND1 (predecessor). This
means that the output signal in AND1 must be generated first, before it can be processed in
OR1. At the same time, OR1 has a successor. This means that OR1 must be entered in the
processing table before the successor.
4. The third FB is AND2, since it has a predecessor (see 3.)

8-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

5. The entries in C0465 are:


– Position 10: AND1 10500
– Position 11: OR1 10550
– Position 12: AND2 10505
This example was started with position 10, because these positions are not assigned in the default
setting.
FBs need not to be entered into the processing table one after the other. Empty positions in the
processing table are permissible.

Tip!
It is also possible that other FBs are entered between the FBs listed in the example.

FBs which do not have to be entered into the processing table


The following signal sources are always executed and do not have to be entered into the processing
table:
• AIF-IN
• CANx-IN
• DIGIN
• DIGOUT
• FCODE (all free codes)
• MCTRL
• fixed signal sources (FIXED0, FIXED0% , etc.)

Frequent faults in the configuration


Malfunction Cause Remedy
FB does not supply an output signal FB was not entered into the processing table Enter FB
C0465
FB only supplies constant signals FB was deleted from or overwritten in the Enter FB again, possibly under a different
procesing table C0465. subcode (position)
The output signal does not arrive at the No connection between the FBs Make connection (from the view of the next
following FB. FBs) by the configuration code (CFG)
FB cannot be entered in the table C0465 Residual process time is too short (see Remove FBs not used (e.g. inputs and outputs
C0466) not used)
In networked drives, functions may be
relocated to other controllers
The controller outputs internally calculated FBs are processed in an incorrect sequence Adapt processing table under C0465 to the
signals with a delay signal flow

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-11


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.4 Description of function blocks


Function blocks
Function block Description
p CPU time used in basic configuration C0005
[µs] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
ABS1 Absolute value generator 5 • •
ADD1 Addition block 9 •
AIF-OUT Field bus 60 • • • • •
AIN1 Analog input X6/1, X6/2 11 • • • • • • •
AIN2 Analog input X6/3, X6/4 29 • • • • • • •
AND1 Logic AND, block1 7 • •
AND2 Logic AND, block2 • •
AND3 Logic AND, block3 • •
AND4 Logic AND, block4 •
AND5 Logic AND, block5
AND6 Logic AND, block6
AND7 Logic AND, block7
ANEG1 Analog inverter 1 4 • • • • • • •
ANEG2 Analog inverter 2 4 •
AOUT1 Analog output X6/62 13 • • • • • • •
AOUT2 Analog output X6/63 13 • • • • • • •
ARIT1 Arithmetic block 1 12 • •
ARIT2 Arithmetic block 2 12
ARITPH1 32-bit arithmetic block 15
ASW1 Analog changeover 1 4 • • • •
ASW2 Analog changeover 2 4 • •
ASW3 Analog changeover 3 4 • •
ASW4 Analog changeover 4 4 • •
BRK Trigger holding brake 17
CAN-OUT System bus 60 • • • • •
CMP1 Comparator 1 15 • • • • • • •
CMP2 Comparator 2 15 • •
CMP3 Comparator 3 15 •
CONV1 Conversion 9
CONV2 Conversion 9
CONV3 Conversion 9 •
CONV4 Conversion 9
CONV5 Conversion 9 •
CONV6 Conversion 9 •
CONVPHA1 32 bit conversion 6
CONVPHPH1 32 bit conversion 80
CONVPP1 32 bit / 16 bit conversion 55
DB1 Dead band 8 •
DCTRL Device control - • • • • • • •
DFIN Digital frequency input 6 • • • • • •
DFOUT Digital frequency output 38 • • • • • • •
DFRFG1 Digital frequency ramp generator 44
DFSET Digital frequency processing 93 • • • •
DIGDEL1 Binary delay element 1 10
DIGDEL2 Binary delay element 2 10
DIGIN Input terminals X5/E1...X5/E5 - • • • • • • •
DIGOUT Output terminals X5/A1...X5/A4 - • • • • • • •
DT1-1 Differential element 13
FCNT1 Piece counter 11

8-12 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function block Description CPU time used in basic configuration C0005


[µs] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
FEVAN1 Free analog input variable 4
FEVAN2 Free analog input variable 4
FIXSET1 Fixed setpoints 10
FLIP1 D-flipflop 1 7 • •
FLIP2 D-flipflop 2 7
GEARCOMP Gearbox torsion 1
LIM1 Limiter 6 • •
MCTRL Servo control - • • • • • • •
MFAIL Mains failure detection 44 - -
MLP1 Motor phase failure detection 30
MONIT Monitoring - • • • • • • •
MPOT1 Motor potentiometer 22
NOT1 Logic NOT, block1 4 • •
NOT2 Logic NOT, block2 4 • •
NOT3 Logic NOT, block3 4 • •
NOT4 Logic NOT, block4 4 •
NOT5 Logic NOT, block5 4 •
NSET Speed setpoint conditioning 77 • • • • •
OR1 Logic OR, block1 7 • • • • •
OR2 Logic OR, block2 • •
OR3 Logic OR, block3 • •
OR4 Logic OR, block4 •
OR5 Logic OR, block5 •
PCTRL1 Process controller 63
PHADD1 32 bit addition block 10
PHCMP1 Comparator 9 •
PHCMP2 Comparator 9 •
PHCMP3 Comparator 9 •
PHDIFF 32 bit setpoint/act. value comparison 10
PHDIV1 Conversion 9
PHINT1 Phase integrator 8
PHINT2 Phase integrator 8
PHINT2 Phase integrator 8
PT1-1 1st order delay element 9
CW/CCW/Q QSP / setpoint inversion 9 • • • •
REF Homing function 110 • • • • •
RFG1 Ramp function generator 18 •
S&H Sample and Hold 5
SRFG1 S-shape ramp function generator 15
STORE1 Memory 1 35
STORE2 Memory 2 20
SYNC1 Multi-axis positioning 55
TRANS1 Binary signal evaluation 8
TRANS2 Binary signal evaluation
TRANS3 Binary signal evaluation
TRANS4 Binary signal evaluation
FCODE 17 Free control codes - • • • • • • •
FCODE 26/1 • • • • • • •
FCODE 26/2 • • • • • • •
FCODE 27/1 • • • • • • •
FCODE 27/2 • • • • • • •
FCODE 32 • • • •

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-13


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function block Description CPU time used in basic configuration C0005


[µs] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
FCODE 37 •
FCODE 108/1 • • • • • • •
FCODE 108/2 • • • • • • •
FCODE 109/1 • • • • • • •
FCODE 109/2 • • • • • • •
FCODE 141 •
FCODE 175 •
FCODE 250 •
FCODE 471 • •
FCODE 472/1
FCODE 472/2
FCODE 472/3 • • • • • •
FCODE 472/4
FCODE 472/5 • • • • •
FCODE 472/6 • •• • • •
FCODE 472/7
FCODE 472/8
FCODE 472/9 • •
FCODE 472/10 • •
FCODE 472/11 •
FCODE 472/12
FCODE 472/13
FCODE 472/14
FCODE 472/15
FCODE 472/16
FCODE 472/17
“FCODE 472/18
FCODE 472/19
FCODE 472/20
FCODE 473/1 • • • •
FCODE 473/2 • • •
FCODE 473/3 • • •
FCODE 473/4
FCODE 473/5
FCODE 473/6
FCODE 473/7
FCODE 473/8
FCODE 473/9
FCODE 473/10
FCODE 474/1
FCODE 474/2
FCODE 474/3
FCODE 474/4
FCODE 474/5
FCODE 475/2

8-14 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.5 Monitoring
Various monitoring functions protect the drive from impermissible operating conditions. ^ 8-17) .
(

If a monitoring function is activated,


• a reaction to protect the drive will be activated (configuration (^ 8-16) ).
• a digital output is set, if it is assigned to the corresponding reaction.
• the fault indication is entered at the first position in the history buffer. (^ 9-3)

8.5.1 Reactions
According to the interferences one or several of the following reactions are possible via the
monitoring function:
• TRIP (highest priority)
• Message
• FAIL-QSP
• Warning
• Off
Reaction Effects on drive or controller Danger notes
TRIP • Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance until TRIP is reset
• The drive is idling (no control!).
• After TRIP reset the drive accelerates to its setpoint along the set ramps.
(^ 9-9)
Message • Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance as long as the
message is active.
• Short-term The drive is idling (no control!) as long as the message is
message ≤ active
The drive restarts automatically if the message
0.5 s If the message is removed, the drive accelerates to its
is removed.
setpoint with maximum torque.
• Long-term The drive is idling (because of internal controller inhibit!) as
message > long as the message is active.
0.5 s If necessary, restart positioning program.
FAIL-QSP Brakes the drive to standstill via the QSP ramp via code C0105.
• The time for the QSP ramp is set in the ”Basic settings” dialog box.
^
• Default setting of FAIL-QSP: ( 9-5)
Warning • Only display of the operating fault
• The drive operates under control.
Since these reactions have no effect on the
drive behaviour,
behavio r the drive may be destroyed.
destroyed
Off • No reaction to operating faults!Monitoring is deactivated.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-15


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.5.2 Set reactions


1. Click on the ”Parameter menu” button in the ”Basic settings” dialog box.
2. Open the ”Dialog Diagnostics” menu by a double-click.

Fig. 8-6 Dialog box ”Diagnostic 9300”

3. Click the button ”Monitorings...”.

Fig. 8-7 ”Monitoring configuration 93xx” dialog box

4. Click on the required monitoring function.


5. Select the possible or permitted reaction and confirm it with ”OK”.
An overview of the monitoring functions and the settings can be obtained from the following chapter.

8-16 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

8.5.3 Monitoring functions


Overview of the fault sources detected by the controller, and the corresponding reactions
Display Meaning TRIP Meldung Warning FAIL-QSP off Code
CCr System error • - - - - -
CE0 Communication error (AIF) á - á - • C0126
CE1 Communication error at the process data input object á - á - • C0591
CAN-IN1 (time monitoring can be set under C0357/1)
CE2 Communication error at the process data input object á - á - • C0592
CAN-IN2 (time monitoring can be set under C0357/2)
CE3 Communication error at the process data input object á - á - • C0593
CAN-IN3 (time monitoring can be set under C0357/3)
CE4 BUS-OFF state (many communication errors occurred) á - á - • C0595
EEr External monitoring • á á á á C0581
H05, H07 Internal error • - - - - -
H10 Sensor fault heatsink temperature • - - - á C0588
H11 Sensor fault: internal temperature • - - - á
LP1 Motor phase failure detection (function block must be á - á - • C0597
entered in C0465)
LU Undervoltage - • - - - -
NMAX Maximum speed exceeded (C0596) • - - - - -
OC1 Short circuit • - - - - -
OC2 Earth fault • - - - - -
OC5 I x t overload • - - - - -
OH Heatsink temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed) • - - - - -
OH3 Motor temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed) • - - - á C0583
OH4 Heatsink temperature 2 (adjustable; C0122) - - • - á C0582
OH7 Motor temperature 2 (can be set; code: C0121) - - • - á C0584
OH8 Motor temperature (fixed) via inputs T1/T2 á - á* - • C0585
OU Overvoltage in the DC bus - • - - - -
P01 Limit switch negative = LOW á - - • - C1285/1
P02 Limit switch positive = LOW á - - • - C1285/2
P03 Contouring error - digital frequency > C0255 á - • - á C0589
P04 Position limit exceeded in negative direction á - - • - C1285/3
P05 Position limit exceeded in positive direction á - - • - C1285/4
P06 No reference á - - • - C1287/1
P07 Parameter set mode absolute á - - • - C1291/1
P08 Actual offset out of range á - - • - C1291/2
P09 Impermissible programming á - - • - C1291/3
P12 Encoder range exceeded á - - • - C1288/1
P13 Phase overflow • - á - á C0590
P14 1st contouring error POS > C1218/1 á - á • á C1286/1
P15 2nd contouring error POS > C1218/2 á - á á • C1286/2
P16 Sync error á - á • á C1290/1
P17 TP control error á - á • á C1289/1
P18 Internal limitation á - • á á C1289/2
PEr Program error • - - - - -
PI Fault during initialization • - - - - -
PR0 General fault in parameter sets • - - - - -
PR1 Fault in parameter set 1 • - - - - -
Sd2 Resolver fault • - á* - á C0586
Sd3 Encoder fault at X9 PIN 8 á - á* - • C0587

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 8-17


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Display Meaning TRIP Meldung Warning FAIL-QSP off Code


Sd5 Encoder fault at X6/1 X6/2 (C0034 = 1) á - á - • C0598
Sd6 Sensor fault: motor temperature (X7 or X8) • - á - á C0594
Sd7 Fault in the absolute value encoder at X8 á - - - • C0025

Configuration
• Default setting
á possible
- not possible
á* possible, but the drive can be destroyed if the fault is not removed immediately.

8.5.4 Fault indication via digital output


In the function block DIGOUT the fault messages TRIP, message and warning can be assigned to
the digital outputs (e. g. terminals X5/A1...X5/A4).

Display TRIP or Message or Warning individually (individual indication):


1. Select digital output in the code level under C0117 and subcode.
2. Assign TRIP or Message or Warning to the parameter level.

Display TRIP, Message, Warning collectively (collective indication):


1. Assign TRIP, Message and Warning to an OR element.
2. Select digital output in the code level under C0117 and subcode.
3. Assign output of the OR-element in the parameter level.

Display monitoring functions individually:


1. Select digital output in the code level under C0117 and subcode.
2. Assign monitoring function (e.g. MONIT-OH7).

8-18 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination


• You can recognize immediately whether a fault has occurred from the display elements or
status information. ^ 9-1, chapter “Troubleshooting”)
(
• You can analyze the fault
– by means of the history buffer (^ 9-3)
– and by means of the list “Fault indications”. ^ 9-5)
(
• The list “Fault indications” indicates how to eliminate faults. (^ 9-5)

9.1 Troubleshooting
Display on the controller
Two LEDs on the front of the controller indicate the controller status.
LED green LED red Cause Check
n o Controller enabled; no fault
 o Controller inhibit, switch-on inhibit C0183; or C0168/1
o  Fail C0168/1
n  Warning, fail-QSP C0168/1

n : on o : off  : blinking

Display in Global-Drive-Control
Double-click ”Dialog Diagnostic” in the parameter menu of the GDC to open the dialog box
Diagnostic 9300 .
• The dialog box Diagnostic 9300 informs about the controller status:

Display on the keypad


Status messages in the display indicate the controller status.
Display Controller status Check
RDY Controller ready for operation, controller can be inhibited C0183, C0168/1
IMP Pulses at the power stage inhibited C0183, C0168/1
Imax Max. current reached
Mmax Max. torque reached
Fail Fault through TRIP, message, fail QSP or warning C0183, C0168/1

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 9-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Display via the LECOM status word C0150


Bit Meaning
0 FREE 0 freely combinable
1 IMP (pulse inhibit)
0 = Pulses enabled for power stage
1 = Pulses inhibited for power stage
2 FREE 2 freely combinable
3 FREE 3 freely combinable
4 FREE 4 freely combinable
5 FREE 5 freely combinable
6 fd = 0 (actual speed value = 0) 0 = [n ≠ 0]
1 = [n = 0]
7 RSP (controller inhibit) 0 = No controller inhibit
1 = Controller inhibit
hex bin
0 0000 Unit initialisation
1 0001 Switch-on inhibit
3 0011 Operation inhibited (controller inhibit)
8-11 Controller status 6 0110 Operation enabled
7 0111 Message active
8 1000 Active fault
9 1001 Power off
A 1010 Fail-QSP
12 Warning 0 = No warning
1 = Warning
13 Meldung 0 = No message
1 = Message
14 FREE 14 freely combinable
15 FREE 15 freely combinable

9-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer


• The history buffer is used to trace faults.
• Fault messages are stored in the order of their occurrence.
Double click ”Dialog Diagnostic” in the parameter menu of the GDC to open the dialog box
Diagnostic 9300 :

History buffer

9.2.1 Structure of the history buffer


• The history buffer has 8 memory units. The fields under ”fault history” show the memory units
2 to 7.
• The fields under ”Actual fault” show memory unit 1. It contains information on the active fault.
– The first memory unit is written only after the elimination or acknowledgement of the active
fault. This entry eliminates the last fault from the history buffer so that it can no longer be
read.
• The history buffer contains three information items for every fault occurred:

€ Fault recognition and reaction


ó Time of the fault
€ ó ì ì Frequency of the fault

The following table shows the assignment of information to the codes.


Code and information to be called Memory unit
C0168 C0169 C0170 Subcode
1 Active fault
2 Memory unit 1
3 Memory unit 2
Frequency of the immediately 4 Memory unit 3
Fa lt recognition and reaction
Fault Time of the last occurrence
occ rrence
following occurrence 5 Memory unit 4
6 Memory unit 5
7 Memory unit 6
8 Memory unit 7

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 9-3


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9.2.2 Working with the history buffer

€ ó ì

ú
ö

Fault recognition and reaction €


• Contains the fault recognition for every memory unit and the reaction to the fault.
– e. g. ”OH3 TRIP”
– For a fieldbus, the fault indications are always represented by a fault number.
^ 9-5, column 2)
(

Please note:
• For faults occurring at the same time with different reactions:
– Only the reaction with the highest priority is entered in the history buffer
(Priority = TRIP → Message → FAIL-QSP → Warning).
• For faults occurring at the same time with the same reaction (e. g. 2 messages):
– Only the fault which occurred first is entered in the history buffer.

Time ó
• Contains the times when the faults occurred.
– e.g. ”1234567 s”
– Reference time is the mains switch-on time (see dialog box Diagnostic 9300 , field top right)

Please note:
• If a fault is immediately followed by another fault for several times, only the time of the last
occurrence is stored.

Frequency ì
• Contains the frequency of a fault immediately followed by the same fault. The time of the last
occurrence is stored.

Reset fault ö
• Click the TRIP reset button to reset the fault.

Clear history buffer ú


• This function is only possible when no fault is active.
• Click the Fault history reset button to clear the history buffer.

9-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9.3 Fault indications

Note!
If the fault indication is requested by a fieldbus (C0168/x), the fault indication is represented by a
fault number in column 2 of the table.

Fault No.: qxxx


 - TRIP
Display  - Message Error Cause Remedy
 - Warning
 - FAIL-QSP
--- --- No fault - -
CCr q071 System error Strong interference on control cables Screen control cables
For 9300 cam profiler: For 9300 cam profiler:
Selection of too many points Reduce number of points to max. 2 points per ms)
Ground or earth loops in the wiring PE wiring. ^ 4-34
CDA q220 Data error Attempt to accept faulty data New data transfer.
q221 Data error warning The checksum of the data transferred is not New data transfer and check.
correct.
CE0 q061 Communication error Interference during transmission of control Plug in automation module firmly, bolt down, if
commands via automation interface X1 necessary
CE1 q062 Communication error at CAN_IN_1 object receives faulty data, or • Check cable at X4
the process data input communication is interrupted • Check transmitter
object CAN_IN_1 • Increase monitoring time under C0357/1 if
necessary
CE2 q063 Communication error at CAN_IN_2 object receives faulty data, or • Check cable at X4
the process data input communication is interrupted • Check transmitter
object CAN_IN_2 • Increase monitoring time under C0357/2 if
necessary
CE3 q064 Communication error at CAN_IN_3 object receives faulty data, or • Check cable at X4
the process data input communication is interrupted • Check transmitter
object CAN_IN_3 • Increase monitoring time under C0357/3 if
necessary
CE4 q065 BUS-OFF state Controller has received too many incorrect • Check wiring
telegrams via system bus X4, and has disconnected • Check bus termination (if any)
from the bus • Check screen contact of the cables
• Check PE connection
• Check bus load:
• Reduce baud rate (observe cable length)
EEr q091 External fault (TRIP-Set) A digital input assigned to the TRIP-Set function has Check external encoder
been activated.
H05 q105 Internal error Contact Lenze
H07 q107 Incorrect power stage During initialization of the controller, an incorrect Contact Lenze
power stage was detected
H10 q110 Sensor fault heat sink Sensor for heat sink temperature detection Contact Lenze
temperature indicates indefinite values
H11 q111 Senso fault indoor Sensor for indoor temperature detection indicates Contact Lenze
temperature indefinite values
LP1 q032 Motor phase failure A current-carrying motor phase has failed • Check motor
• Check supply module
The current limit is set too high Set a lower current limit value under C0599
This monitoring is not suitable for: Deactivate monitoring with C0597= 3
• Synchronous servo motors
• at field frequencies > 480 Hz
LU q030 Undervoltage DC bus voltage is smaller than the value fixed under • Check mains voltage
C0173 • Check supply cable
rMAX q200 Max. speed exceeded Active load (e.g. for hoists) too high Check drive dimensioning.
(C0596) Drive is not speed-controlled, torque excessively Increase torque limit if necessary.
limited.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 9-5


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Fault No.: qxxx


 - TRIP
Display  - Message Error Cause Remedy
 - Warning
 - FAIL-QSP
OC1 q011 Short-circuit Short-circuit. Find out cause of short-circuit; check cable.
Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor Use motor cable which is shorter or of lower
cable. capacitance.
OC2 q012 Earth fault One of the motor phases has earth contact. • Check motor
• Check supply module
Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor Use motor cable which is shorter or of lower
cable. capacitance.
OC5 q015 I x t overload Frequent and overlong acceleration with overcurrent Check drive dimensioning.
Continuous overload with Imotor > 1.05 x Irx.
OH q050 Heat sink temperature is Ambient temperature Tamb > 40 °C or 50 °C. • Allow controller to cool and ensure better
higher than the value set ventilation.
in the controller • Check ambient temperature in the control
cabinet.
Heat sink very dirty. Clean heat sink
Incorrect mounting position. Change mounting position.
OH3 1) q053 Heat sink temperature is Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
g than the value set frequent and overlong acceleration
higher
i th
in the controller
t ll No PTC connected. Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring (C0583= 3).
OH4 q054 Heat sink temperature is Ambient temperature Tamb > 40 °C or 50 °C. • Allow controller to cool and ensure better
higher than the value set ventilation.
under C0122. • Check ambient temperature in the control
cabinet.
Heat sink very dirty. Clean heat sink
Incorrect mounting position. Change mounting position.
Value set under C0122 was too low. Enter higher value.
OH7 1) q057 Motor temperature is Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
g than the value set frequent and overlong acceleration
higher
under
d C0121
C0121. No PTC connected. Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring (C0584= 3).
Value set under C0121 was too low. Enter higher value.
OH8 q058 PTC at terminals T1, T2 Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
indicates motor frequent and overlong acceleration
overheat.
h t Terminals T1, T2 are not assigned. Connect PTC or thermostat or switch off monitoring
(C0585= 3).
OU q020 Overvoltage Excessive brake energy (DC bus voltage higher than Use brake module or energy recovery module.
set under C0173).
P01 q151 Limit switch negative Negative limit switch was reached. • Control drive in positive direction
• Check terminal connection X5/E2.
P02 q152 Positive limit switch Positive limit switch was reached. • Control drive in negative direction
• Check terminal connection X5/E1.
P03 q153 Second contouring error Phase difference between set and actual position is • Extend contouring error limit under C0255
larger than the contouring error limit set under • Switch off the monitoring if necessary (C0589 =
C0255. 3).
Drive cannot follow the digital frequency (Imax limit). Check drive dimensioning.
P04 q154 Negative position limit Negative position limit (C1224) was not reached. Find out why the value was not reached (e.g.
”incorrect” position targets, set function position
value) and adjust the negative position limit (C1224)
if necessary.
P05 q155 Positive position limit Positive position limit (C1223) was exceeded. Find out why the value was exceeded (e.g.
”incorrect” position targets, set function position
value) and adjust the positive position limit (C1223)
if necessary.
P06 q156 No reference The homing point is unknown. For absolute Perform one of the following functions and restart:
positioning no homing was performed before the • Manual homing.
first positioning. • Start homing in the program.
• Set reference.

9-6 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Fault No.: qxxx


 - TRIP
Display  - Message Error Cause Remedy
 - Warning
 - FAIL-QSP
P07 q157 PS Absolute mode An absolute PS (C1311) was performed during Perform one of the following functions and restart:
instead of relative mode. relative positioning (position mode C1210). • Change from absolute PS to relative PS.
• Change position mode.
P08 q158 Actual offset out of Actual home offset (C1226) out of position limits. Adjust position limits if necessary, or check whether
range. Fault of the program function ”Set position value”. program function ”Set position value” is to be
applied.
P09 q159 Impermissible Impermissible programming Check position program:
programming • After a PS with final speed a PS with positioning
has to follow; waiting for input is not
permissible.
P12 q162 Encoder range The range of the absolute encoder was exceeded. • Return drive by manual positioning.
• Check position limits and adjustment of the
encoder.
• The absolute encoder has to be dimensioned
and mounted such that its range is not exceeded
over the complete positioning range.
P13 q163 Phase overflow • Phase controller limit reached • Enable drive
• Drive cannot follow the digital frequency (Imax • Check drive dimensioning
limit).
P14 q164 1st contouring error The drive cannot follow the setpoint. Contouring • Increase current limit C0022 (observe max.
error is higher than limit value in C1218/1. motor current).
• Reduce acceleration.
• Check drive dimensioning.
• Increase limit value under C1218.
P15 q165 2nd contouring error The drive cannot follow the setpoint. Contouring • Increase current limit C0022 (observe max.
error is higher than limit value in C1218/2. motor current).
• Reduce acceleration.
• Check drive dimensioning.
• Increase limit value under C1218.
P16 q166 Transmission error of a Sync telegram from master (PLC) is out of time Set C1121 (Sync cycle) to the transmission cycle of
synch
y telegram
g on the pattern. * the master (PLC).
system
t bbus. Sync telegram of master (PLC) is not received. * • Check communication channel.
• Check baud rate, controller address.
Controller enable (RFR) too soon. Enable controller with delay. The required delay
depends on the time between the synch telegrams.
* C0362 displays the delay between two 2 sync telegrams (C0362 = 0, communication interrupted).
P17 q167 TP control error Simultaneous use of the TP input by different Configure another TP input for FB POS (not possible
function blocks (e.g. FB DFSET and POS). A conflict for DFSET) or switch off monitoring under C0580.
occurs.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 9-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Fault No.: qxxx


 - TRIP
Display  - Message Error Cause Remedy
 - Warning
 - FAIL-QSP
P18 q168 Internal limitation Data generated by calculations of the 9300 servo positioning controller cannot be varied arbitrarily. If the
value falls below or exceeds the internal limit value the warning “P18” will be set and the value is limited
to the minimum or maximum.
C1298 = 1: Check the entries under C1202-4, C1207/1.2.
The negative position limit in C1223 is outside the If necessary, read the value decreased in the event
possible display range of of a fault under C1220/10 and overwrite the value
1 ≤ (C1223∗ C1205) ≤ 1.07E9 incr entered under C1223.
C1298 = 2: Check the entries under C1202-4, C1207/1.2.
The positive position limit in C1224 is outside the If necessary, read the value decreased in the event
possible display range of of a fault under C1220/11 and overwrite the value
1 ≤ (C1224∗ C1205) ≤ 1.07E9 incr entered under C1224.
C1298 = 3: Check the entries under C0011, C1202-4,
The maximum speed vmax under C1240 exceeds C1207/1.2. If necessary, read the value decreased
the possible display range of in the event of a fault under C1220/12 and
1 ≤ (C1240 ∗ C1205 ∗ 16,384) ≤ 2.14E9 incr or overwrite the value entered under C1240.
vmaxnot C1240 / C1204 ∗ 60 ≤ 1.5 ∗ nmax Adapt the value under C1240 to C0011.
C1298 = 4: Check the entries under C1202-4, C1207/1.2.
The maximum acceleration amax in C1250 exceeds If necessary, read the value decreased in the event
the possible display range of of a fault under C1220/13 and overwrite the value
1 ≤ (C1250 ∗ C1205 ∗ 16.384 / 1000) ≤ 2.8634E7 entered under C1250.
incr
C1298 = 5: Check the entries under C0011, C1207/1.2.
An internal value range has been exceeded for a
speed normalization. Valid range:
1 ≤(C0011 ∗C1207/1 /C1207/2 ∗65536/60000) ≤32
767
P21 q171 Contouring error RC Phase difference between set and actual position is Extend contouring error limit with C1328. If
larger than the contouring error limit set under necessary, switch off the monitoring (C1329= 3).
C1328.
Drive cannot follow the digital frequency (Imax limit). Check drive dimensioning.
PEr q074 Program fault A fault in the program was detected. Send controller with data (on diskette) to Lenze.
PI q079 Initializing error • A fault was detected during transfer of Correct parameter set.
parameter set between the controllers
• Parameter set does not match controller.
PR0 q075 Parameter set error Fault when loading a parameter set. • Set the required parameters and store them
PR1 q072 CAUTION: under C0003.
The factory setting loaded automatically. • For PRO the supply voltage must be switched off
additionally.
Sd2 q082 Resolver fault Resolver cable interrupted. • Check the resolver cable for open circuit
• Check resolver.
• or switch off monitoring (C0586 = 3).
Sd3 q083 Encoder fault at X9/8 Cable interrupted. Check cable for open circuit.
Input X9 PIN 8 not assigned. Assign input X9 PIN 8 with 5V or switch off
monitoring (C0587 = 3).
Sd5 q085 Master current source Master current at X6/1 X6/2 < 2mA. • Check cable for open circuit.
defective • Check master current source.
Sd6 q086 Sensor fault Encoder of the motor temperature detection at X7 Check supply cable for firm connection.
or X8 indicates indefinite values. Switch off monitoring with C0594 = 3 if necessary.
Sd7 q087 Encoder fault Absolute encoder with RS485 interface does not Check supply cable.
transmit data. Check encoder.
Check voltage supply C0421.
No Stegmann encoder connected.

1) Temperature detection via resolver or incremental encoder.

9-8 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9.4 Reset of fault messages


Reaction on Measures for re-commissioning Danger notes
operating errors
TRIP/ FAIL-QSP • After the error has been eliminated, the drive can be restarted when an
acknowledgement has been sent.
• TRIP / FAIL-QSP acknowledgement by:
– Global-Drive-Control: Click ”Trip reset” in dialog box ”Diagnostics

^
9300”.
9-4, (“Working with the history buffer”)
If a TRIP source is still active, TRIP cannot be
– Keypad 9371 BB:
reset.
Press STOP key. Then press RUN to enable the controller again.
– Fieldbus module: Set C0043 = 0
– Control word C0135
– Terminal X5/E5 (default setting) or “DCTRL-TRIP-RESET”
– Control word AIF
– Control word system bus (CAN)
Message • After eliminating the fault, the message is reset automatically.
The drive restarts automatically if the fault is
eliminated.

Warning • After eliminating the fault, the warning is reset automatically.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 9-9


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

9-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Maintenance

10 Maintenance
• The controller is free of maintenance if the prescribed conditions of operation are observed.
^ 3-2)
(

• If the ambient air is polluted, the air vents of the controller may be obstructed. Therefore,
check the air vents periodically (depending on the degree of pollution approx. every four
weeks):
Free the obstructed air vents using a vacuum cleaner.

Stop!
Do not use sharp or pointed tools such as knives or screwdrivers to clean the air vents.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 10-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Maintenance

10-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11 Appendix

11.1 Accessories
For the controllers, Lenze offers the following accessories:
• Mains filter
• Fuses
• Fuse holders
• System cable for resolver
• System cable for digital frequency coupling

A PC can be connected to the controller via the field bus module LECOM A/B (RS232, RS485 or fibre
optics). The Global-Drive-Control (GDC)PC program allows a simple programming of the controller.

Global Drive Control (GDC) PC program


The program runs under Windows and is supplied with drivers for LECOM A/B (RS232, RS485 or
optical fibre).

Further functions of the PC program:


• Process signal visualization
• Diagnostics and troubleshooting
• Commissioning support
• Oscilloscope function

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-1


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.2 Application examples

11.2.1 Speed control

The most important settings (short setup)

Note!
The following codes are contained in the menu: ”Short Setup / Speed mode” of the Module 9371
BB or in the menu: ”Short commissioning / Speed operation” of Global Drive Control or LEMOC 2.

Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)


C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 xxx Enter LENZE motor type

Enter maximum motor current


C0022 xxxA Determine Imax

Enter controller configuration


C0005 1000 Select speed control
C0025 xxx Enter feedback system

Speed setpoint settings


C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0012 xxx s Set acceleration time
C0013 xxx s Set deceleration time
C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time

Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n controller
C0071 xxx Tn n-controller

Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

11-2 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks


Fig. 11-1

NSET-CINH-VAL
Ramp generator main setpoint
MCTRL-NACT C0784 NSET
R/L/Q C0798/1
X5 NSET-RFG-STOP
R FIXED0 C0790
QSP
Signal flow chart for configuration 1000

DIGIN DIGIN1 QSP C0799/13


E1 L NSET-RFG-0
R/L
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2 C0789
E3 DIGIN3 C0799/12 S- shape Linking of
0 NSET-N-INV
E4 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
C0781 main and
1 CINH
E5 C0799/1 C0182 C0190 additional setpoint
DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET NSET-N
C0780
0 200%
C0039/1 X
AIN1
C0046 C0039/2
1
Y +
- * NSET-NOUT
C0034 *-1
X6
NSET-JOG*1
DMUX C0039/15 / X/(1-Y)
C0787/1 0
1 +
C0787/2 NSET-JOG*2
JOG1...15 C0045 C0134
0
2 + C0787/3 NSET-JOG*4
15
C0241
FIXED0 NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013
C0787/4 3 C0101/1 C0103/1
C0101/2 C0103/2
C0027/1 NSET-RFG-I=0
C0026/1 MCTRL-NSET2 DMUX
NSET-TI*1
C0788/1 0 C0101/15 C0103/15
NSET-TI*2
ASW1 C0788/2 0 TI 0...15
X6 NSET-TI*4
AIN2 C0812/1 C0788/3 15 C439/1 AOUT2
NSET-TI*8 X6
C0788/4 3 C0130 AOUT2-IN
3 + 0 C0436
+
63
NSET-SET +
4 + 1 C0785 AOUT2-GAIN
C0438
FIXED0% C0798/2 C0439/3
NSET-LOAD AOUT2-OFFSET
C0026/2 C0027/2 C0786 C0437
C0799/3 C0220/ C0439/2
NSET-NADD-INV C0221 CINH
FIXED0 C0783
NSET-NADD C0799/2 0 C434/1 AOUT1
BA9300SU EN 2.1

MCTRL-QSP-OUT X6
C0782 1 AOUT1-IN +
*-1 C0431 62
C0049 Ramp generator additional setpoint AOUT1-GAIN +
C0433
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
MCTRL C0432
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP MCTRL-QSP-OUT
C0434/2

R/L/Q-QSP MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3
ANEG C0893
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM Current controller
*-1 C0906/4
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
C0892 C0030 DFOUT
MCTRL-NSET2
C0906/3 C0540
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
MCTRL-MMAX FIXED-PHI-0 C0542
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET2
C0902 C0549
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0056 DFOUT-AN-IN
MCTRL-IMAX
FIXED0% C0901 C0541
Speed controller MCTRL-IACT
a

C0105 C0906/8
C0547
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT DFOUT-SYN-RDY
100%
FIXED0 C0544
1 1
VECT-CTRL PWM CTRL C0540
MCTRL-N-SET 0
+ + + 0
0
C0548
C0890 + - + 1
X5 E5
C0906/1 Phase controller C0072
0 X10
C0254 C0070 C0545 1
C0006 C0018
C0071 Torque X9

Appendix
FIXED0INC MCTRL-PHI-SET C0022 2
C0894 1
-
limitation C0075 3
C0908 C0076
+ 4
C0077
FIXED0% MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 5
C0895 C0078 X8
Speed C0081
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0906/5
FIXED0 C0897 limitation C0084
C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087
FIXED0% C0896 C0017
C0088
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089
FIXED0% C0891 C0090
CONST C0091
CMP1
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
FIXED100% C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7 C0683/1 DIGOUT X5
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT TRIP DIGOUT1
X7 Actual speed NACT=0 C0118/1...4 A1
MCTRL-NACT DIGOUT2
A2
ENCODER MCTRL-PHI-ANG RDY DIGOUT3 0
C0051
X8 C0420 A3
C0011 C0497 C0680 MMAX DIGOUT4 1
C0490 C0025 A4
C0495 C0681
11-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

EGHIJOHMKP
C
C
C

D

QJRJSLN OFF
KGTURVNLMRKMHLI

ON
EGHIJKLIMGKMLN F K1

EGHIJKPLWR
`
C
K1

F1 F2
C C C D _
 
 
 _
 D
93XX
9352
X 

] \ D      D       [     [ ` `

_
^ 
  C

F

 
E

RB `
YZD DZ

ELMLN
9300std016

Fig. 11-2 Connection diagram of configuration 1000

Note!
A brake unit is required only if the DC bus voltage of the 93XX servo inverter in the generator mode
exceeds the upper switch-off threshold set under C0173 (activation of the OU monitoring function).
The brake unit avoids the activation of ”OU” by converting the kinetic energy of the machine into
heat and thus keeps the DC bus voltage below the upper switch-off threshold.

11-4 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.2.2 Torque control with speed limitation

The most important settings (short setup)

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: ”Short Setup / Torque mode” of the Module 9371
BB or in the menu: ”Short commissioning / Torque operation” of Global Drive Control or LEMOC 2.

Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)


C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 xxx Enter LENZE motor type

Enter maximum motor current


C0022 xxxA Determine Imax

Enter controller configuration


C0005 4000 Select torque control
C0025 xxx Enter feedback system

Speed setpoint settings


C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time

Speed limitation
C0472/4 xxx % nmax Determine lower speed limit

Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n controller
C0071 xxx Tn n-controller

Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-5


11-6
Fig. 11-3
NSET-CINH-VAL Ramp
o generator main setpoint
MCTRL-NACT C0784 NSET
R/L/Q C0798/1
X5 NSET-RFG-STOP
R FIXED0 C0790
QSP
DIGIN DIGIN1 QSP C0799/13
E1 L NSET-RFG-0
R/L C0789
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E3 DIGIN3 C0799/12 S-shape Linking of main
0 NSET-N-INV
E4 C0781 and additional
1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
E5 C0799/1 CINH C0182 C0190 setpoint
DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET NSET-N
Show/Hide Bookmarks

C0780
C0039/1
0 200%
C0046 C0039/2
x NSET-NOUT
1 -
AIN1 C0034 *-1 y + *
X6 DMUX C0039/15 / x/(1-y)
NSET-JOG*1
C0787/1 0
1 + NSET-JOG*2 C0045 C0134
C0787/2 0 JOG1...15
2 + NSET-JOG*4 C0241
C0787/3 15
NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013
C0787/4 3
C0101/1 C0103/1
Appendix

C0101/2 C0103/2
C0026/1 C0027/1 DMUX NSET-RFG-I=0
NSET-TI*1 C0101/15 C0103/15
C0788/1 0
NSET-TI*2
C0788/2 0 TI 0...15
X6 NSET-TI*4
AIN2 C0788/3 15 C439/1 AOUT2
NSET-TI*8 X6
C0788/4 3 C0130 +
3 + AOUT2-IN
C0436 63
+ NSET-SET +
4 MTCRL-NSET2 C0785 AOUT2-GAIN
C0438
C0798/2 C0439/3
MCTRL-QSP-OUT NSET-LOAD AOUT2-OFFSET
C0026/2 C0027/2 C0786 C0437
C0439/2

Signal flow chart of configuration 4000


C0799/3 C0220/
NSET-NADD-INV C0221 CINH
FIXED0 C0783
NSET-NADD C0799/2 0 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0782 1 AOUT1-IN +
*-1 C0431 62
C0049 Ramp generator additional setpoint +
AOUT1-GAIN
C0433
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
MCTRL C0432
C0472/3 C0434/2
DCTRL-QSP  MCTRL-QSP-OUT
R/L/Q-QSP MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3
ANEG MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0893 Current controller
*-1 MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892 C0030 DFOUT
MCTRL-NSET2
C0906/3 C0540
MCTRL-N/M-SWT

BA9300SU EN 2.1
FIXED1 C0899 C0050 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
MCTRL-MMAX FIXED-PHI-0 C0542
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET2
C0902 C0549
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0056 DFOUT-AN-IN
MCTRL-IMAX
FIXED0% C0901 C0541
C0105 C0906/8 Speed controller MCTRL-IACT
C0547
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT DFOUT-SYN-RDY
100% FIXED0 C0544
1 1 CTRL
MCTRL-N-SET + + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM
C0548 C0540
0 0
C0890 + - + 1
X5 E5
C0906/1 Phase controller 0 X10
C0072
C0254 C0070 C0545 1
C0071
Torque - C0006 C0018
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0022 X9 2
FIXED0INC C0894 1 limitation C0075 3
C0908 -
C0076
+ 4
C0077
FIXED0% MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 5
C0895 X8
C0906/5 Speed C0081
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0084
FIXED0 C0897 limitation C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087
C0472/4 C0896 C0017
C0088
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089
C0891 C0090
CONST C0091
CMP1
FIXED100% MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7 C0683/1 DIGOUT X5
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT TRIP DIGOUT1
X7 Act. speed NACT=0 C0118/1...4 A1
MCTRL-NACT DIGOUT2
A2
ENCODER MCTRL-PHI-ANG RDY DIGOUT3 0
C0051
X8 C0420 A3
C0011 C0497 MMAX DIGOUT4 1
C0490 C0025 C0680 A4
C0495 C0681

9300std023


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.2.3 Digital frequency - master - drive

The most important settings (short setup)

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: ”Short Setup / DF master” of the Module 9371 BB
or in the menu: ”Short commissioning / Digital frequency master” of Global Drive Control or LEMOC
2.

Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)


C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 xxx Enter LENZE motor type

Enter maximum motor current


C0022 xxxA Determine Imax

Enter controller configuration


C0005 5000 Digital frequency - master in general
5900 with emergency stop for the drive network for QSP
C0025 xxx Enter feedback system

Speed setpoint settings


C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0012 xxx s Set acceleration time
C0013 xxx s Set deceleration time
C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time for C0005 = 5000
C0672 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time for C0005 = 59xx
C0032 xxx Gearbox factor numerator
C0033 xxx Gearbox factor denominator
C0473/1 xxx Numerator of the stretch factor
C0533 xxx Denominator of the stretch factor

Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n controller
C0071 xxx Tn n-controller
C0254 xxx Gain of the phase controller

Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-7


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Fig. 11-4
11-8

NSET-CINH-VAL
MCTRL-NACT C0784 NSET
C0798/1
NSET-RFG-STOP
C0790
C0799/13
Signal flow chart for configuration 5000

FIXED0 NSET-RFG-0
C0789
C0799/12
NSET-N-INV C0030

Appendix
AIN1 C0034 C0781 DFOUT
X6 C0540
C0799/1 CINH C0182 C0190 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
1 + NSET-N FIXEDPHI-0 C0542
C0780
2 + 0 200% C0549
C0039/1 x
C0046 C0039/2
*-1
1
y +
- * NSET-NOUT
C0541
DFOUT-AN-IN

NSET-JOG*1
DMUX C0039/15 / x/(1-y)
C0547
C0026/1 C0027/1 C0787/1
NSET-JOG*2
0
C0787/2 0 JOG1...15 C0045 C0134 DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0787/3 NSET-JOG*4
15
C0241 FIXED0 C0544
NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013 CTRL C0540
C0787/4 3 C0548
C0101/1 C0103/1
C0101/2 C0103/2
NSET-RFG-I=0 X5 E5
DMUX 0 X10
NSET-TI*1
FIXED0 C0788/1 0 C0101/15 C0103/15
C0545 1
NSET-TI*2 X9
C0788/2 0 TI 0...15 2
NSET-TI*4
C0788/3 15 3
NSET-TI*8
C0788/4 3 C0130 4
NSET-SET X8 5
MCTRL-NSET2 C0785
C0798/2
MCTRL-QSP-OUT NSET-LOAD
C0786
ASW1 C0799/3 C0220/
NSET-NADD-INV C0221 CINH
X6 AIN2 C0812/1 C0783
3 + 0 NSET-NADD C0799/2 0
C0782 1
4 + 1 *-1
FIXED0% C0049

FIXDE0
C0026/2 C0027/2
BA9300SU EN 2.1

C0525
DFSET-0-PULSE
C0534
DFSET
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1 C0474/1 C0933 REF
MCTRL-PHI-ACT REF-ACTPOS-IN C0932
DFSET-ACK
X5
2
CTRL C0925 C0930
E5 C0926/1 C0931
1 C0528/1 C0934
X9/6,7 REF-POS-LOAD
Speed C0535
C0924
C0935
C0936
C0532
C0472/5 C0524
DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0927/3 CTRL
C0926/3
REF-MARK C0926/4
C0537 C0921 REF-OK
DFSET-RAT-DIV
C0032 C0522 C0927/2 REF-BUSY
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT REF-ON
C0473/1 C0521 C0920
C0536/1 Phase offset C0927/1
DFSET-IN
a a Set phase REF-N-IN
REF-N-SET
a a + DFSET-NOUT
C0923
C0520 * b * b +
C0539 b b C0530 C0929
REF-PSET
C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 REF-PHI-IN
C0922
0 + + + DFSET-PSET C0928
OR1-IN1 OR1 1
+ + -
RSP C0830/1 DFSET-SET
C0831/1 C0527 C0528/2
 C0538/3
QSP OR1-IN2 OR1-OUT DFSET-RESET
C0830/2 C0526
C0831/2
DFSET-A-TRIM C0538/2 Phase trimming
OR1-IN3
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529
C0830/3 C0536/3
C0831/3
Phase trimming=f(n)
FIXED0

X5
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
28
DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
1
E4 DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET

E5 C0443

Show/Hide Bookmarks


MCTRL
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP  MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
DIGIN1 C0900
C0042
C0907/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0893
ANEG Current controller
C0906/4
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C439/1 AOUT2
*-1 C0892 X6
MCTRL-NSET2 AOUT2-IN +
C0906/3 C0436 63
MCTRL-N/M-SWT +
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 AOUT2-GAIN
MCTRL-MMAX C0108/2 C0438
C0907/2 C0439/3
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET2
FIXED0 C0902 AOUT2-OFFSET
C0109/2 C0437
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0056 MCTRL-IMAX C0439/2
FIXED0% C0901
C0105 C0906/8 Speed controller MCTRL-IACT
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT
100% C0017
1 1
MCTRL-N-SET + + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM DIGOUT
0 0 TRIP DIGOUT1
C0890 + - + 1 C0117/1 X5
CMP1 NACT=0 DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0906/1 C0117/2
Phase controller C0072 RDY DIGOUT3
0
A1
C0254 C0070 C0117/3
C0006 C0018 C0683/1 DIGOUT4 A2
C0071 C0117/4 1
1
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0022
C0894 1 Torque limitation C0444/1 A3
C0075
C0908 - C0444/2
C0076 C0444/3 A4
+
C0077 C0444/4
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 C0680
C0472/6 C0895
C0906/5
Speed C0081 C0681
BA9300SU EN 2.1

MCTRL-PHI-ON
FIXED1 C0897 limitation C0084
C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087 C434/1 AOUT1
FIXED0% C0896 X6
C0088 AOUT1-IN +
C0906/6 C0089 C0431 62
MCTRL-M-ADD +
FIXED0% C0891 C0090 AOUT1-GAIN
CONST C0108/1 C0433
C0091
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2 C0434/3
FIXED100% C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA AOUT1-OFFSET
C0109/1 C0432
C0906/7 MCTRL-PHI-ACT C0434/2
RESOLVER
X7
Actual speed MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
ENCODER C0051
X8 C0420
C0011 C0497
C0490 C0025
C0495

Appendix
11-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.2.4 Digital frequency bus - slave - drive

The most important settings (short setup)

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: ”Short Setup / DF slave bus” of the Module 9371
BB or in the menu ”Short commissioning / Digital frequency slave line” of Global Drive Control or
LEMOC 2.

Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)


C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 xxx Enter LENZE motor type

Enter maximum motor current


C0022 xxxA Determine Imax

Enter controller configuration


C0005 6000 Select digital frequency bus - slave
C0025 xxx Enter feedback system

Speed setpoint settings


C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0032 xxx Gearbox factor numerator
C0033 xxx Gearbox factor denominator
C0425 xxx Adapt encoder constant to the master

Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n controller
C0071 xxx Tn n-controller
C0254 xxx Gain of the phase controller

Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

11-10 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Fig. 11-5
X10


Show/Hide Bookmarks

DFSET-0-PULSE
FIXED0 C0525 C0534
DFSET
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
DFSET-ACK
X5 CTRL
2
E5
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7
X9 Speed C0933 REF
C0532 C0535 REF-ACTPOS-IN C0932
DFIN DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0474/1 C0925 C0930
C0472/5 C0524
C0926/1 C0931
C0537 C0934
DFSET-RAT-DIV REF-POS-LOAD
C0032 C0522 C0935
C0924
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT C0936
C0473/1 C0521 C0927/3 CTRL
C0425 C0926/3
C0536/1 Phase offset REF-MARK C0926/4
a a C0921
DFSET-IN + Set phase DFSET-NOUT REF-OK
a a
C0520 * b * b C0927/2 REF-BUSY
+
C0539 b b C0530 REF-ON
OR1 C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 C0920
CINH 0 + + C0927/1
 + DFSET-PSET
1 REF-N-SET
QSP + + - REF-N-IN
DFSET-SET C0923
C0527 C0528/2
FIXED0 C0929
C0538/3 REF-PSET
DFSET-RESET REF-PHI-IN
C0526 C0922
C0538/2 Phase trimming
DFSET-A-TRIM C0928
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529
DCTRL -X5/28 C0536/3 Act. phase
DIGIN

Signal flow chart of configuration 6000


X5
DIGIN-CINH Phase trimming =f(n)
28
DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
1
E4 DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET
E5 C0443

MCTRL
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP  MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
DIGIN1 C0900
C0042

BA9300SU EN 2.1
C0907/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM AOUT2
ANEG C0893 C439/1 X6
C0906/4 Current controller +
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
*-1 C0892 63
MCTRL-NSET2 +
C0906/3
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET2 C0108/2
FIXED0 C0902
C0907/4 C0056
MCTRL-I-SET MCTRL-IMAX C0109/2
FIXED0% C0901
C0105 C0906/8 MCTRL-IACT
Speed controller
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT
100%
1 1
+ + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0 C0017 DIGOUT
C0890 + - + 1 TRIP DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
C0906/1 Phase controller NACT=0 DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0072 C0117/2
C0254 C0070 CMP1 DIGOUT3 A1
C0006 C0018 RDY C0117/3 0
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0071 Torque DIGOUT4
C0894 C0022 C0117/4 1 A2
1 1
limitation C0075
C0908 - C0683/1
C0076 C0444/1 A3
+
C0077 C0444/2
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 C0444/3 A4
C0472/6 C0895
C0906/5 C0081 C0444/4
MCTRL-PHI-ON Speed C0084
FIXED1 C0897
limitation C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087 C0680
FIXED0% C0896 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0088 C0681
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089 +
Appendix

FIXED0% C0891 C0090 62


CONST C0091
+
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
FIXED100% C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT C0108/1
X7 Act. speed MCTRL-NACT
C0109/1
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0051
ENCODER C0420
X8 C0011 C0497
C0490 C0025
C0495

9300std025

11-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.2.5 Digital frequency cascade - slave - drive

The most important settings (short setup)

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: ”Short Setup / DF slave cas” of the Module 9371
BB or in the menu: ”Short commissioning / Digital frequency slave cascade” of Global Drive Control
or LEMOC 2.

Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)


C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 xxx Enter LENZE motor type

Enter maximum motor current


C0022 xxxA Determine Imax

Enter controller configuration


C0005 7000 Select digital frequency cascade - slave

Speed setpoint settings


C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0032 xxx Gearbox factor numerator
C0033 xxx Gearbox factor denominator
C0425 xxx Adapt encoder constant to the master
C0473/1 xxx Numerator of the stretch factor
C0533 xxx Denominator of the stretch factor

Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n controller
C0071 xxx Tn n-controller
C0254 xxx Gain of the phase controller

Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

11-12 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Fig. 11-6


C0030 DFOUT
C0540
DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
C0542
DFSET-0-PULSE
C0549
Show/Hide Bookmarks

FIXED0 C0525 C0534


DFSET
C0538/1 X5 C0531 DFOUT-AN-IN
2 FIXED0% C0541
E4
1 C0547
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
DFSET-ACK DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 CTRL C0544
2 C0474/1 FIXED0
E5 CTRL C0540
1 C0528/1 C0548
X9/6,7
X9 C0933 X5 E5
Speed C0535 REF-ACTPOS-IN REF 0 X10
C0532 C0932
DFIN DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0925 C0930 C0545 1
C0472/5 C0524 X9
C0926/1 C0931 2
C0537 C0934 3
DFSET-RAT-DIV REF-POS-LOAD
C0032 C0522 C0935 4
C0924
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT C0936 X8 5
C0473/1 C0521 C0927/3 CTRL
C0425 C0926/3
C0536/1 Phase offset REF-MARK C0926/4
a a C0921
DFSET-IN + Set phase DFSET-NOUT REF-OK
a a
C0520 * b * b C0927/2 REF-BUSY
+
C0539 b b C0530 REF-ON
OR1 C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 C0920
CINH 0 + + C0927/1
 + DFSET-PSET
1 REF-N-SET
QSP + + - REF-N-IN
DFSET-SET C0923
C0527 C0528/2
FIXED0 C0929
C0538/3 REF-PSET
DFSET-RESET REF-PHI-IN
C0526 C0922
C0538/2 Phase trimming
DFSET-A-TRIM C0928
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529
C0536/3
Act. phase
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
X5 Phase trimming =f(n)
DIGIN-CINH
28

Signal flow chart for configuration 7000


DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
1
E4 DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET
E5 C0443

MCTRL
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP  MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
DIGIN1 C0900 C0042
C0907/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM

BA9300SU EN 2.1
ANEG C0893 C439/1 AOUT2
Current controller X6
C0906/4 +
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
*-1 C0892 63
MCTRL-NSET2 +
C0906/3
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET2 C0108/2
FIXED0 C0902
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0056 C0109/2
MCTRL-IMAX
FIXED0% C0901
C0105 C0906/8 MCTRL-IACT
Speed controller
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT
100%
1 1
+ + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0 C0017 DIGOUT
C0890 + - + 1 TRIP DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
C0906/1 Phase controller NACT=0 DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0072 C0117/2
C0254 C0070 CMP1 DIGOUT3 A1
C0006 C0018 RDY C0117/3 0
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0071 Torque DIGOUT4
C0894 C0022 C0117/4 1 A2
1 1
limitation C0075
C0908 - C0683/1
C0076 C0444/1 A3
+
C0077 C0444/2
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 C0444/3 A4
C0472/6 C0895
C0906/5 C0081 C0444/4
MCTRL-PHI-ON Speed C0084
FIXED1 C0897
limitation C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087 C0680
FIXED0% C0896 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0088 C0681
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089 +
FIXED0% C0891 C0090 62
CONST +
C0091
Appendix

MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
FIXED100% C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
RESOLVER C0108/1
X7 Act. speed MCTRL-NACT
C0109/1
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0051
C0420
C0011 C0497
C0490 C0025
C0495

9300std026

11-13
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Fig. 11-7
11-14

Connection diagram of configuration digital frequency

Appendix
S tr e tc h u n it 2
P u ll-o ff u n it (m a s te r d r iv e ) S tr e tc h u n it 1

v = 5 0 m /m in v = 8 0 m /m in v = 1 1 0 m /m in

i= 1 9 .4 i= 5 .3 i= 5 .3

R M D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
R M R M
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
BA9300SU EN 2.1

+ 2 4 V e x te rn a l + 2 4 V e x te rn a l
X 7 X 1 0 X 9 X 7 X 1 0 X 9 X 7 X 1 0
9 3 0 0 M a s te r
V p u ll- o ff 9 3 0 0 S la v e 9 3 0 0 S la v e
2 E 4 E 4
S tre tc h > S tre tc h >
- = + E 3 E 3
S tre tc h < S tre tc h <
1
S tre tc h fa c to r S tre tc h fa c to r

G e a rb o x G e a rb o x G e a rb o x

2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2 2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2 2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2

+ 2 4 V + 2 4 V + 2 4 V
e x te rn a l e x te rn a l e x te rn a l

P L C
n s e t= 0 n s e t= 0 n s e t= 0

R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x

P ro c e s s c o n tro l
R ig h t R ig h t R ig h t
Q S P Q S P Q S P
9300STD127

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.3 Code table

How to read the code table:


Row Abbreviation Meaning
Code C0039 Code C0039
1 Subcode 1 of code C0039
2 Subcode 2 of code C0039
... ...
14 Subcode 14 of code C0039
15 Subcode 15 of code C0039
[C0005] Parameter value of the code can only be modified when the controller is inhibited
LCD Keypad LCD
• Display of the short text, e.g. 3$5 /2$'
Lenze Factory setting of the code

Choice
g
*

1 {1 %}
The row ”Important” contains further information
Codes only display values. They cannot be configured.
99 Minimum value {smallest step/unit} maximum value
Important - Additional, important explanation of the code
Printed in bold: Code name in GDC
^ 11-15 Reference to a page indicating further information on a code.

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0002 3$5 /2$' 0 0 Load default Load parameter set
Load factory setting into RAM
1 Load PS1 Load parameter set x into the RAM and activate
2 Load PS2 • Parameter set1 is loaded automatically after
3 Load PS3 every mains connection.
4 Load PS4
11 Load ext PS1 Load parameter set x from the operating
12 Load ext PS2 module into the RAM and activate
13 Load ext PS3
14 Load ext PS4
20 ext -> EEPROM Transmit all parameter sets from the operating
module to the controller and store non-volatile
C0003 3$5 6$9( 0 0 Ready Save parameter set
Saving completed
1 Save PS1 Save current parameter set x non-volatile
2 Save PS2
3 Save PS3
4 Save PS4
11 Save extern Save all parameter sets to the operating
module
C0004 23 ',63/$< 56 All available codes Operating display
Operating module shows selected code in the
operating level if no other status indications of
C0183 are active. e

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-15


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0005] 6,*1$/ &)* 1000 Signal configuration
(Predefined basic configurations)

The digit indicates the predefined controller


control
• xxx1:
RS232, RS485 or fiber-optics
• xxx3:
InterBus-S or Profibus
• xxx5:
Systembus (CAN)
The last digit but one indicates the predefined
voltage source for the control terminals
• xx0x:
external supply voltage
• xx1x:
internal voltage supply via X5/A1
The last digit but two indicates additional
functions
• x1xx:
Brake control
• x9xx:
in case of quick stop the complete
connection of drives is phase-controlled to
zero speed
0000 Common Modified basic configuration

1 86xx -1- compatible to frequency inverter 86xx:


2 86xx -2- C005 = -1-/-2-/-11-
11 86xx -11-
20 922x -20- compatible to servo controller 922x: C005 =
21 922x -21- -20-/-21-
100 empty All internal connections are removed

1000 Speed mode Speed control


1001 Speed 1
1003 Speed 3
1005 Speed 5
1010 Speed 10
1011 Speed 11
1013 Speed 13
1015 Speed 15
1100 Speed 100
1101 Speed 101
1103 Speed 103
1105 Speed 105
1110 Speed 110
1111 Speed 111
1113 Speed 113
1115 Speed 115
4000 Torque mode Torque control with speed limitation
4001 Torque 1
4003 Torque 3
4005 Torque 5
4010 Torque 10
4011 Torque 11
4013 Torque 13
4015 Torque 15

11-16 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
5000 DF mst Master for digital frequency coupling
5001 DF mst 1
5003 DF mst 3
5005 DF mst 5
5010 DF mst 10
5011 DF mst 11
5013 DF mst 13
5015 DF mst 15
5900 DF mst 900
5901 DF mst 901
5903 DF mst 903
5905 DF mst 905
5910 DF mst 910
5911 DF mst 911
5913 DF mst 913
5915 DF mst 915
6000 DF slv bus Slave to digital frequency bus
6001 DF slv bus 1
6003 DF slv bus 3
6005 DF slv bus 5
6010 DF slv bus 10
6011 DF slv bus 11
6013 DF slv bus 13
6015 DF slv bus 15
7000 DF slv cas Slave to digital frequency cascade
7001 DF slv cas 1
7003 DF slv cas 3
7005 DF slv cas 5
7010 DF slv cas 10
7011 DF slv cas 11
7013 DF slv cas 13
7015 DF slv cas 15
[C0006] 23 02'( * Motor control operation
1: SSC norm Y Å depends on C0086
sensorless control for motors in star connection • Change of C0086 resets value to the
2: Servo async Y assigned default setting
Servo control asynchronous motors in star connection • Change of C0006 sets C0086 = 0!
3: Servo PM-SM Y
Servo control synchronous motors in star connection
11: SSC norm
Sensorless control for motors in delta connection
22: Servo async
Servo control asynchronous motors in delta connection
C0009 /(&20 $''5(66 1 1 {1} 99 LECOM unit address
Bus device number when operated via interface
• 10, 20, ..., 90 reserved for broadbast to
device groups for RS232, RS485, fibre
optics.
C0011 1NDV 3000 500 {1 rpm} 16000 Maximum speed
Reference value for the absolute and relative
setpoint selection for the acceleration and
deceleration times.
• Parameter setting via interface:
Large changes in one step should only be
made when the controller is inhibited.
C0012 7,5 $&& 0,000 0,000 {0,001 s} 999.900 NSET acceleration time Tir
for the main setpoint of NSET
(ref to speed change 0...nmax.)
C0013 7,) '(& 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET deceleration time Tif
for the main setpoint of NSET
(ref to speed change 0...nmax.)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-17


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0017 )&2'( 40,1 50 -16000 {1 rpm} 16000 Switching threshold nact. < nx
nact. < C0017:
1 8 kHz sin activates the comparator output CMP1-OUT
2 16 kHz sin 1: Power optimised operation
2: Noise optimiszed operation
C0018 GEIOP 1 0 {1} 2 Chopper frequency fchop
Noise optimised operation with automatich
changeover to 8 kHz
0 16/8 kHz
1 8 kHz sine
2 16 kHz sine
C0019 7+5(6+ 1$&7  0 0 {1 rpm} 16000 Threshold nact , if nact. = 0 is recognized.
C0021 6MJPEONP 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 20.00 Slip compensation
active only in sensorless control
C0022 ,0$; &855(17 * 0 {0.01 A} 2.00 Ir Imax limit current for 9321 to 9324
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned factory setting (1.5*Imotor)
• With 9321 to 9324 changeover when
controller is inhibited to Imax > 1.5 Ir
possible
[C0025] )(('%$&. 7<3( 10 0 COMMON Feedback
1 no feedback Input of the encoder specified on the nameplate
10 RSx (Resolver) of the Lenze motor:
110 IT
IT-512-5V
512 5V C0025 aautomatically
tomatically changes C0420
C0420, C0490
C0490,
111 IT-1024-5V C0495
112 IT-2048-5V • 0:
113 IT-4096-5V C0420, C0490 or C0495 was changed
210 IS-512-5V subsequently
211 IS-1024-5V • 1:
212 IS-2048-5V y
Control without feedback system ((sensorless
control,
t l SSC)
213 IS-4096-5V
310 AS-512-8V
• 10:
The resolver is designated with RSxxxxxxxx.
410 AM-512-8V
• 110: IT-512-5V
• 111: IT-1024-5V
• 112: IT-2048-5V
IT-4096-5V
113: IT 4096 5V
Incremental encoder with TTL level
• 210: IS-512-5V
211: IS-1024-5V
212: IS
IS-2048-5V
2048 5V
213: IS-4096-5V Sin/cos encoder
• 310: AS-512-8V
Multi turn Sin/cos encoder with RS485
interface Stegmann
• 410: AM-512-8V single-turn Sin-Cos
encoder, Stegmann
C0026 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (OffsetAIN)
1 )&2'( OGGRFS 0.00 Used for relative analog signals
2 )&2'( OGGRFS 0.00 1: Offset for terminal X6/1,2
2: Offset for terminal X6/3,4
C0027 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (AIN)
1 )&2'( *$,1 100.00 Used for relative analog signals
2 )&2'( *$,1 100.00 1: Gain X6/1,2
2: Gain X6/3,4

11-18 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0030 ')287 &2167 3 0 {1 inc/rev} 6 DFOUT constant
Constant for the digital frequency output in
increments per revolution
0 256
1 512
2 1024
3 2048
4 4096
5 8192
6 16384
C0032 )&2'( *($5%2; 1 -32767 {1} 32767 FCODE (gearbox factor numerator)
C0033 *($5%2; '(120 1 1 {1} 32767 FCODE (gearbox factor (denominator)
C0034 067 &855(17 0 0 -10 V ... + 10 V Selection: Master voltage/master current
1 + 4 mA ... + 20 mA for setpoint selection
2 -20 mA ... + 20 mA
C0037 6(7 9$/8( 530 0 -16000 {1 rpm} 16000 Setpoint selection in rpm
C0039 -199.99 {0.01 } 199.99 NSET JOG setpoints
1 -2* 6(7 9$/8( 100.00 Fixed speeds (JOG setpoints) can be selected
2 -2* 6(7 9$/8( 75.00 for NSET using digital inputs.
3 -2* 6(7 9$/8( 50.00
4 -2* 6(7 9$/8(
25.00
5 -2* 6(7 9$/8(
0.00
... 
...
14 -2* 6(7 9$/8(
0.00
15 0.00
-2* 6(7 9$/8(

C0040 &75/ (1$%/( 1 0 {1} 1 Controller enable


0: “write”, controls the code

C0042 QRP g 0
1
QSP inactive
QSP active
1: “read”, reads controller status
Status Quick stop

C0043 75,3 5(6(7 0 no/trip reset (TRIP reset) Fault reset


1 trip active (”TRIP” active) Reset of an active trip:

C0045 DES -2* g 0


1
Nset active
JOG 1
• Set C0043 = 0
NSET JOG selection

2 JOG 2
...

C0046 1 g
g
15
-199.99
JOG 15
{0.01 %} 199.99 NSET-N Main setpoint
C0049
C0050
1$''

0&75/ 16(7 g
g
-199.99
-100.00
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
199.99
100.00
NSET-NADD Additional setpoint
MCTRL-NSET2 nset at speed controller input
C0051
C0052
0&75/ 1$&7

0&75/ 8NOS g
g
x
0
{1 rpm}
{1 V}
30000
800
Actual speed
Motor voltage
C0053
C0054
C0056
8H TOMSDHF

,0OS g
g
0
0
-100.00
{1 V}
{1 A}
{0.01 %}
900
500.0
100.00
DC-bus voltage
Imot (motor current)
Torque setpoint (output of the speed

g
0&75/ 06(7
controller)
C0057 0$; 72548( 0.0 {0.1 Nm} 500.0 Maximum torque (C86/C22)
Maximum possible torque of the drive
configuration

C0058 52725 ',)) g -180.0 {0.1 °} 179.9


• depending on C0022, C0086
Frequency at inverter
Zero phase of the rotor for synchronous motors

C0059
C0060
027 32/( 12 g
g 1
0
{1}
{1}
x
2048
(C0095)
Motor pole pair number
Motor rotor position

g
52725 326
1 turn = 2048 inc
C0061
C0063
C0064
+($76,1. 7(03

0OS SFNP

87,/,=$7,21
g
g
0
0
0
{1 °C}
{1 °C}
{1 %}
100
200
150
Heatsink temperature
Motor temperature
Controller load I x t during the last 180 s
• C0064 > 100 % releases Trip OC5
• Trip reset only possible if C0064 < 95 %

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-19


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0067 $&7 75,3 g


Lenze Choice
see selection list 10
All fault indications
Fault message TRIP
Momentary fault indication
C0070 93 63((' &75/ * 0.0 {0.5} 255.0 Vpn speed controller
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
C0071 71 RPFF' &75/ * 1.0 {0.5 ms} 600.0 Tnn speed controller
> 512 ms switched off
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
C0072 7' RPFF' &75/ 0.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 32.0 Tdn speed controller
C0075 9P E855 &75/ 0.35 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Vpi current controller
C0076 71 E855 &75/ 1.8 0.5 {0.1 ms} 1999.0 Tni current controller
2000 ms switched off
C0077 9P GJFM' &75/ 0.25 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Vp field controller
C0078 71 GJFM' &75/ 15.0 1.0 {0.5 ms} 7999.0 Tn field controller
8000 ms switched off
[C0081] 0OS POUF5 * 0.01 {0.01 kW} 150.00 Rated motor speed
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
• Change of C0081 sets C0086 = 0
[C0084] 0OS 5R * 0.00 {0.01 Ω} 100.00 Motor stator resistance
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
[C0085] 0OS /R * 0.00 {0.01 mH} 200.00 Motor leakage inductivity
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
[C0086] 0OS SWPF * Motor type selection
Å depends on the controller
• Change of C0086 resets C0006, C0022,
C0070, C0071, C0081, C0084, C0085,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091 to the
assigned default setting
0 COMMON no Lenze motor
New generation Lenze asynchronous servo motors New generation Lenze asynchronous servo
with integrated temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder motors
cable. with integrated temperature monitoring via
• The temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder cable is resolver or encoder cable.
activated automatically, i.e.: • The temperature monitoring via resolver or
C0583 = 0 encoder cable is activated automatically,
C0584 = 2 i.e.:
C0594 = 0 C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0

11-20 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
10 DSKA56-140 MDSKAXX056-22, fN : 140Hz
11 DFKA71-120 MDFKAXX071-22, fN : 120Hz
12 DSKA71-140 MDSKAXX071-22, fN : 140Hz
13 DFKA80-60 MDFKAXX080-22, fN : 60Hz
14 DSKA80-70 MDSKAXX080-22, fN : 70Hz
15 DFKA80-120 MDFKAXX080-22, fN : 120Hz
16 DSKA80-140 MDSKAXX080-22, fN : 140Hz
17 DFKA90-60 MDFKAXX090-22, fN : 60Hz
18 DSKA90-80 MDSKAXX090-22, fN : 80Hz
19 DFKA90-120 MDFKAXX090-22, fN : 120Hz
20 DSKA90-140 MDSKAXX090-22, fN : 140Hz
21 DFKA100-60 MDFKAXX100-22, fN : 60Hz
22 DSKA100-80 MDSKAXX100-22, fN : 80Hz
23 DFKA100-120 MDFKAXX100-22, fN : 120Hz
24 DSKA100-140 MDSKAXX100-22, fN : 140Hz
25 DFKA112-60 MDFKAXX112-22, fN : 60Hz
26 DSKA112-85 MDSKAXX112-22, fN : 85Hz
27 DFKA112-120 MDFKAXX112-22, fN : 120Hz
28 DSKA112-140 MDSKAXX112-22, fN : 140Hz
Lenze asynchronous servo motors Lenze asynchronous servo motors
without integrated temperature monitoring without integrated temperature monitoring
• The temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder cable is • The temperature monitoring via resolver or
deactivated automatically, i.e.: encoder cable is deactivated automatically,
C0583 = 3 i.e.:
C0584 = 3 C0583 = 3
C0594 = 3 C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
50 DSVA56-140 DSVAXX056-22, fN : 140Hz
51 DFVA71-120 DFVAXX071-22, fN : 120Hz
52 DSVA71-140 DSVAXX071-22, fN : 140Hz
53 DFVA80-60 DFVAXX080-22, fN : 60Hz
54 DSVA80-70 DSVAXX080-22, fN : 70Hz
55 DFVA80-120 DFVAXX080-22, fN : 120Hz
56 DSVA80-140 DSVAXX080-22, fN : 140Hz
57 DFVA90-60 DFVAXX090-22, fN : 60Hz
58 DSVA90-80 DSVAXX090-22, fN : 80Hz
59 DFVA90-120 DFVAXX090-22, fN : 120Hz
60 DSVA90-140 DSVAXX090-22, fN : 140Hz
61 DFVA100-60 DFVAXX100-22, fN : 60Hz
62 DSVA100-80 DSVAXX100-22, fN : 80Hz
63 DFVA100-120 DFVAXX100-22, fN : 120Hz
64 DSVA100-140 DSVAXX100-22, fN : 140Hz
65 DFVA112-60 DFVAXX112-22, fN : 60Hz
66 DSVA112-85 DSVAXX112-22, fN : 85Hz
67 DFVA112-120 DFVAXX112-22, fN : 120Hz
68 DSVA112-140 DSVAXX112-22, fN : 140Hz
New generation Lenze synchronous servo motors New generation Lenze synchronous servo
with integrated temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder motors
cable. with integrated temperature monitoring via
• The temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder cable is resolver or encoder cable.
activated automatically, i.e.: • The temperature monitoring via resolver or
C0583 = 0 encoder cable is activated automatically,
C0584 = 2 i.e.:
C0594 = 0 C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0
110 DSKS56-23-150 MDSKSXX056-23, fN : 150Hz
111 DSKS56-33-150 MDSKSXX056-33, fN : 150Hz
112 DSKS71-13-150 MDSKSXX071-13, fN : 150Hz
113 DFKS71-13-150 MDFKSXX071-13, fN : 150Hz
114 DSKS71-23-150 MDSKSXX071-23, fN : 150Hz
115 DFKS71-23-150 MDFKSXX071-23, fN : 150Hz
116 DSKS71-33-150 MDSKSXX071-33, fN : 150Hz
117 DFKS71-33-150 MDFKSXX071-33, fN : 150Hz

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-21


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
Lenze inverter motor in star connection Lenze inverter motor in star connection
• The temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder cable is • The temperature monitoring via resolver or
deactivated automatically, i.e.: encoder cable is deactivated automatically,
C0583 = 3 i.e.:
C0584 = 3 C0583 = 3
C0594 = 3 C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
210 DXRA071-12-50 DXRAXX071-12, fd: 50Hz
211 DXRA071-22-50 DXRAXX071-22, fd: 50Hz
212 DXRA080-12-50 DXRAXX080-12, fd: 50Hz
214 DXRA090-12-50 DXRAXX090-12, fd: 50Hz
215 DXRA090-32-50 DXRAXX090-32, fd: 50Hz
216 DXRA100-22-50 DXRAXX100-22, fd: 50Hz
217 DXRA100-32-50 DXRAXX100-32, fd: 50Hz
218 DXRA112-12-50 DXRAXX112-12, fd: 50Hz
219 DXRA132-12-50 DXRAXX132-12, fd: 50Hz
220 DXRA132-22-50 DXRAXX132-22, fd: 50Hz
221 DXRA160-12-50 DXRAXX160-12, fd: 50Hz
222 DXRA160-22-50 DXRAXX160-22, fd: 50Hz
223 DXRA180-12-50 DXRAXX180-12, fd: 50Hz
224 DXRA180-22-50 DXRAXX180-22, fd: 50Hz
Lenze inverter motor in delta connection Lenze inverter motor in delta connection
• The temperature monitoring via resolver or encoder cable is • The temperature monitoring via resolver or
deactivated automatically, i.e.: encoder cable is deactivated automatically,
C0583 = 3 i.e.:
C0584 = 3 C0583 = 3
C0594 = 3 C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
250 DXRA071-12-87 DXRAXX071-12, fd: 87Hz
251 DXRA071-22-87 DXRAXX071-22, fd: 87Hz
252 DXRA080-12-87 DXRAXX080-12, fd: 87Hz
254 DXRA090-12-87 DXRAXX090-12, fd: 87Hz
255 DXRA090-32-87 DXRAXX090-32, fd: 87Hz
256 DXRA100-22-87 DXRAXX100-22, fd: 87Hz
257 DXRA100-32-87 DXRAXX100-32, fd: 87Hz
258 DXRA112-12-87 DXRAXX112-12, fd: 87Hz
259 DXRA132-12-87 DXRAXX132-12, fd: 87Hz
260 DXRA132-22-87 DXRAXX132-22, fd: 87Hz
261 DXRA160-12-87 DXRAXX160-12, fd: 87Hz
262 DXRA160-22-87 DXRAXX160-22, fd: 87Hz
263 DXRA180-12-87 DXRAXX180-12, fd: 87Hz
264 DXRA180-22-87 DXRAXX180-22, fd: 87Hz
[C0087] 0OS RPFF' 3950 300 {1 rpm} 16000 Rated motor speed
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
[C0088] 0OS E855F1S 2.4 0.5 {0.1 A} 300.0 Rated motor current
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
[C0089] 0OS G5FQ8F1EW 140 10 {1 Hz} 1000 Rated motor frequency
[C0090] 0OS TOMSDHF 390 50 {1 V} 500 Rated motor voltage
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned default setting
[C0091] 0OS EOR PIJ 0.7 0.50 {0.01} 1.00 Motor cos ϕ
Å depends on C0086
• Change of C0086 resets value to the

C0093 '5JTF J'F1S g 0 invalid


assigned default setting
Controller identification

1 none
93xx 93xx Type of Lenze servo inverter
C0094 3DRRUO5' 0 0 9999 Password

11-22 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0095] 5OSO5 POR D'K 0 0 inactive Rotor position adjustment of a synchronous
1 active motor
C0058 displays the zero angle of the rotor
C0095 = 1 starts position adjustment
[C0096] /1: AIF access protection
1 $,) 3527(&7 0 0 No password protection /2: CAN access protection
2 &$1 3527(&7 0 1 Read protection Extended password protection for bus systems
2 Write protection with activated password (C0094).

C0099
C0101
6: TF5RJO1 g 3
x.xx
0,000
Read/write protection

{0,001 s} 999.900
• All codes in the user menu can be accessed.
Software version
NSET-Tir (additional acceleration time)
1 D'' 7J5 0. Additional acceleration times Tir for the main
2 D'' 7J5 0.000 setpoint of NSET (ref. to speed change
...  ... 0...nmax.)
15 D'' 7J5
0.000
C0103 0,000 {0,001 s} 999.900 NSET-Tif (additional deceleration)
1 D'' 7JG 0. Additional deceleration times Tif for the main
2 D'' 7JG 0.000 setpoint of NSET
...  ... (ref to speed change 0...nmax.)
15 D'' 7JG
0.000
C0105 463 7JG 0.000 0,000 {0,001 s} 999.900 QSP deceleration time for quick stop
Ref. to speed change 0...nmax.
C0108 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCOD (gain AOUT)
1 )&2'( HDJ1 100.00 Used for relative analog signals
2 )&2'( HDJ1 100.00
C0109 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (offset AOUT)
1 )&2'( OGGRFS 0.00 Used for relative analog signals
2 )&2'( OGGRFS 0.00
C0114 0 {1} 1 DIGIN polarity E1 .. E6 Terminal polarity
1 ',*,1 POM 0 0:HIGH active; 1: LOW active
2 ',*,1 POM 0 1 X5/E1
3 ',*,1 POM 0 2 X5/E2
4 ',*,1 POM
1 3 X5/E3
5 ',*,1 POM
0 4 X5/E4
5 X5/E5
[C0116] 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Signal configuration FDO
1 )'2 FDO 0
...  ...
32 )'2 FDO 31
Free digital outputs can only be evaluated when
networked with automation interfaces.
[C0117] * → Selection list 2 Signal configuration DIGOUT
1 ',HO8S 15000 DCTRL-TRIP Å depending on C0005
2 'JHO8S 10650 CMP1-OUT 1 X5/A1
3 'JHO8S 500 DCTRL-RDY 2 X5/A2
4 'JHO8S
5003 MCTRL-MMAX 3 X5/A3
4 X5/A4
C0118 0 {1} 1 Terminal polarity DIGOUT
1 ',*287 POM 1 0 High active
2 ',*287 POM 1 1 Low active
3 ',*287 POM 0 1: X5/A1, 2: X5/A2, 3: X5/A3, 4: X5/A4
4 ',*287 POM
0
C0121 2+ MJNJS 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Temperature threshold for early warning motor
temperature (OH7 fault)
C0122 2+ MJNJS 85 45 {1 °C} 85 Temperature threshold for warning heat sink
temperature (fault OH4)
C0125 %D8'5DSF 0 0 9600 baud LECOM baud rate
1 4800 baud for accessory module 2102
2 2400 baud
3 1200 baud
4 19200 baud

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-23


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0126 021,7 &( 3 0 Trip Conf. CE0
2 Warning Configuration communication error monitoring

C0130
C0134
DES 7J

5)* EID5DE
g
0
3

0/1
Off with automation interface CE0
NSET actual Ti times
NSET RFG characteristic
Ramp characteristic for main setpoint
0: linear
1: S-shaped
C0135 &O1S5OM UO5' 0 0 {1} 65535 Control word
Controller control word for LECOM-A/B/LI or

C0136
1 &75/:25'
g operating module.
Control word C135
Control word in DCTRL
2 &75/:25' Control word in CAN-IN1
3 &75/:25' Control word in AIF-IN
C0141 )&2'( RFSTDM 0.00 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Main setpoint
Used for relative analog signals. Used as main
setpoint in configurations C0005 = xxx1
C0142 6SD5S OPSJO1R 1 0 {1} 1 Start conditions are executed:
• after mains connection
• after message (t > 0.5s)
• after trip
0 Start lock

C0150 6SDS8R UO5' g 0 {1} 65535


1 Autostart
Status word when networked with automation
interfaces

C0151 )'2 ': g Bit00 {01} Bit 31


• Binary interpretation indicates the bit states
FDO signals (DW)
Display (hex.) of free digital outputs

C0155 67$786 :25'  g Bit00 {01} Bit 15


• Binary interpretation indicates the bit states
Status word 2
Display (hex.) of free digital outputs
• Binary interpretation indicates the bit states
[C0156] → Selection list 2 STAT# (status word)
1 67$7% 2000 DCTRL-PAR*1-O Configuration of the free bits of the status word
2 67$7% 5002 MCTRL-IMAX
3 67$7% 5003 MCTRL-MMAX
4 67$7%
5050 NSET-RFG I= O
5 67$7%
10650 CMP1-OUT
6 505 DCTRL-CW/CCW

g
67$7%
7 67$7%
500 DCTRL-RDY
C0157 0 1 STAT# (status word)

g
&
Display of C0156
C0161 $ES S5JP All fault indications Fault message TRIP
(see chapter 9.3) momentary fault indiations (as under C0168/1)
C0167 0 0 No reset History buffer reset

g
5FRFS GDJMNFN
1 Reset Clears the history buffer
C0168 All fault indications History buffer number
1 )DJM 1O DES (see chapter 9.3) • List of faults occurred
2 )DJM 1O OM' History buffer
3 )DJM 1O OM' Faults are
4 )DJM 1O OM'
1: active
5 )DJM 1O OM'
2: last
6 )DJM 1O OM'
3: last but one
7 )DJM 1O OM'
4: last but three
8 5: last but four
)DJM 1O OM'
6: last but five
7: last but six
8: last but seven

11-24 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0169
1 )DJMSJNF DES
g
Lenze Choice
corresponding mains switch-on time History buffer
• List of times when the faults have occurred
2 )DJMSJNF OM' under C0168
3 )DJMSJNF OM'
• related to C0179
4 )DJMSJNF OM'
Occurrence of the faults
5 )DJMSJNF OM'
1: active
6 2: last
)DJMSJNF OM'
7 3: last but one
)DJMSJNF OM'
8 4: last but three
)DJMSJNF OM'
5: last but four
6: last but five

g
7: last but six
8: last but seven
C0170 0 {1} 65535 Fault counter History buffer
1 &O81SF5 DES • List of how often the faults have occurred
2 &O81SF5 OM' consecutively under C0168
3 &O81SF5 OM'
Fault frequency
4 &O81SF5 OM'
1: active
5 &O81SF5 OM'
2: last
6 3: last but one
&O81SF5 OM'
7 4: last but three
&O81SF5 OM'
8 5: last but four
&O81SF5 OM'
6: last but five
7: last but six
8: last but seven
[C0172] 29 5('8&( 10 0 {10 V} 100 OV reduce
Threshold to activate the brake torque
reduction before OU fault
[C0173] 8* MJNJS 1 Adaptation UG thresholds
• check during commissioning and adapt, if
necessary
• all drive components in DC bus connections
must have the same thresholds
0 Mains< 400V+ -B 0: Operation on mains < 400 V with or without
brake unit
1 Mains= 400V+ -B 1: Operation on 400 V mains with or without
brake unit
2 Mains= 460V+ -B 2: Operation on 460 V mains with or without
brake unit

g
3 Mains= 480V-B 3: Operation on 480 V mains without brake unit
4 Mains= 480V+ B 4: Operation on 480 V mains with brake unit
C0178 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Elapsed time meter

g
2P SJNF5
Time when the controller was enabled
C0179 0DJ1R SJNF5 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Counter for times when mains was
switched on:
Time when the mains was switched on
C0182 7J 6 RIDPF' 20.00 0.01 s {0.01 s} 50.00 s NSET Ti-S shape RFG
Ti time of the S-curve ramp function generator
for NSET
Determines the S-shape
• low values ⇒small S rounding
• high values ⇒large S rounding

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-25


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0183 'JDH1ORSJER g
Lenze Choice
Drive diagnostics
• indicates fault or status information
• if several items or fault or status
information are to be shown, the
information with the smallest number is
displayed
0 OK 0: No fault
101 Init 101: Initialisation phase
102 Trip 102: TRIP active
103 RFG P-OFF 103: Emergency stop
104 IMP Message 104: Message active
105 Power off
111 BSP C135 105 - 113: Operation inhibited
112 BSP AIF
113 BSP CAN
121 CINH term 28 121: Controller inhibited through X5/28
122 CINH int 1 122: DCTRL-CINH1
123 CINH int 2 123: DCTRL-CINH2
124 CINH C135/STP 124: STOP key of 9371BB
125 CINH AIF 125: Controller inhibited through AIF
126 CINH CAN 126: Controller inhibited through CAN
141 Lock mode 141: Restart protection active
142 IMP 142: High resistance power outputs
151 QSP ext term 151: QSP via MCTRL-QSP
152 QSP C135/STP 152: QSP via STOP key
153 QSP AIF 153: QSP via AIF
154 QSP CAN 154; QSP via CAN
250 Warning 250: Warning active
C0190 16(7 D5JS 0 0 {1} 5 NSET arithmetic function
Connects main setpoint C0046 and additional
setpoint C0040
0 OUT = C46
1 C46 + C49
2 C46 - C49
3 C46 * C49
4 C46 / C49
5 C46/(100 - C49)
C0195 %5. 7 DES 99.9 0.0 {0.1 s} 99.9 BRK1 Brake engagement time
Engagement time of the mechanical holding
brake
• after the time elapsed under C0195, the
status ”mechanical brake closed” is reached

C0196 %5. 7 5FMFDRF 0.0 0.0 {0.1 s} 60.0 BRK1 Disengagement time of the brake
Disengagement time of the mechanical holding
brake (Technical data of brakes)
• after the time has elapsed under C0196, the

C0200 g status ”mechanic brake open” is reached.


Software ID number (identification of

g
6: ,'
software)
C0201
C0203
6: 'DSF

g
g x / xxxx / xxxxx
software generation
Commission number

g
.ONN 1O

C0204 0 {1} 65535 Serial number

g
6(5,$/ 12

C0207 Download-Info 1

g
'/ ,1)2 

C0208 '/ ,1)2  Download-Info 2


C0209 '/ ,1)2  Download-Info 3
C0220 16(7 7J5 D'' 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET Tir additional setpoint
Acceleration time Tir of the additional setpoint
for NSET
(ref. to speed change 0...nmax.)
C0221 16(7 7JG D'' 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET Tif additional setpoint
Deceleration time Tif of the additional setpoint
for NSET
(ref to speed change 0...nmax.)

11-26 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0222 3&75/ 9P 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL Vp gain
Process controller gain Vp
C0223 3&75/ 71 400 20 {1 ms} 99998 PCTRL Tn integral component
99999 ms switched off
C0224 3&75/ .' 0.0 0.0 {0.1} 5.0 PCTRL Kd differential component
C0241 16(7 5)* , 2 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 NSET threshold RFG on= off
Threshold ramp function generator for main
setpoint
Input = output , (100 % = nmax)
C0244 %5. 0 RFS 0.00 -100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 BRK1 holding torque
Holding torque of the DC injection brake
100 % = value of C0057
C0250 )&2'( %JS FCODE 1 bit digital
C0252 $1HMF OGGRFS 0 -245760000 {1 inc} 245760000 DFSET phase offset
Fixed phase offset for digital frequency
configuration
• 1 turn = 65536 inc
C0253 $1HMF 1 S5JN * -32767 {1 inc} 32767 DFSET n-dependent phase trimming
Å depending on C0005, C0025, C0490
• Change of C0005, C0025, or C0490 resets
C0253 to the default setting
• 1 turn = 65536 inc
• C0253 is reached at 15000 rpm
C0254 9P D1HMF &75/ 0.4000 0.0000 {0.0001} 3.9999 MCTRL Vp Phase controller
C0255 7I5FRIOM' 3 327680 10 {1 inc} 1800000000 Contouring error limit for fault P03
• 1 turn = 65536 inc
• Following error > C0255 releases fault
”P03”
C0260 0327 IJHI 100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1 upper limit
Condition: C0260 > C0261
C0261 0327 MOU -100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1 lower limit
Condition: C0261 < C0260
C0262 0327 7J5 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1 Tir Acceleration time
C0263 0327 7JG 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1 Tif Deceleration time
Ref. to change 0...100 %
C0264 0327 O1OGG 0 0 {1} 5 Deactivation function of motor pot
0 no change • Function which is executed when motor pot
1 Deceleration with Tif to 0% is deactivated via the input
2 Deceleration with Tif to C0261 MPOT1-INACTIVE.
3 Inhibit with Tif = 0 to 0%
4 Inhibit with Tif = 0 to C0261
5 Acceleration with Tir to C0260
C0265 0327 J1JS 0 0 {1} 2 Initialization function of motor pot
0 Value during mains failure • Value which is accepted during mains
1 lower limit of C0261 switching and activated motor pot.
2 0%
[C0267] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs motor potentiometers
1 83
2 '2:1

[C0268]
C0269
1
J1DES

&
g
1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Configuration motor potentiometer input
Display of
&

2 & &
3 & &

C0292 66& ,N RFS 0.00 0.00 {0.01 A} 500.00 Motor current setpoint
Set approx. 1.0 to 1.1 rated motor current for
sensorless control.
C0294 9P G5Q ES5M 10.0 0.0 {0.1} 99.9 Prpportional gain frequency controller
* depending on C0086
C0295 71 G5Q ES5M 2 2 {1 ms} 20000 Adjustment time frequency controller
* depending on C0086
C0296 '<1$0,& &2167 100 0 {0.1} 32767 Dynamic constant

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-27


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0325 9P D'DPS 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL Adaptation Vp2
Process controller adaptation gain (Vp2)
C0326 9P D'DPS 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL Adaptation Vp3
Process controller adaptation gain (Vp3)
C0327 6FS D'DPS 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL Adaptation nset2
Set speed threshold of the process controller
adaptation
Condition: C0327 > C0328
C0328 6FS D'DPS 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL Adaptation nset1
Set speed threshold of the process controller
adaptation
Condition: C0328 < C0327
C0329 $'$37 212)) 0 0 no process controller adaptation PCTRL Adaptation on/off
1 external via input Activate process controller adaptation
2 Adaptation via setpoint
3 Adaptation via control difference
C0332 3&75/ 7J5 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Process controller acceleration time Tir
Ref. to setpoint change 0...100 %
C0333 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Process controller deceleration time Tir

g
3&75/ 7JG
Ref. to setpoint change 0...100 %
C0336 DES 9P 0.0 {0.1} 500.0 Process controller momentary Vp
C0337 %J81JPOMD5 0 0 bipolar Process controller range bipolar/unipolar
1 unipolar
C0338 $5,7 G81ES 1 0 {1} 5 ARIT1 function
0 OUT = IN1
1 IN1 + IN2
2 IN1 - IN2
3 IN1 * IN2
4 IN1 / IN2
5 IN1/(100% - IN2)
[C0339] 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration arithmetic blockARIT1
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C0340 & Display of C0339


[C0350] &$1 D''5FRR 1 1 {1} 63 CAN bus node address
[C0351] &$1 %D8'5DSF 0 0 500 kbit/s CAN bus baud rate
1 250 kbit/s
2 125 kbit/s
3 50 kbit/s
4 1000 kbit/s
[C0352] &$1 NRS 0 0 slave CAN master operation
1 Master Install CAN bus master operation
C0353 0 {1} 1 CAN IN/OUT address selection
1 &$1 D''5 RFM 0 Source for CAN bus IN/OUT addresses
2 &$1 D''5 RFM 0 0 C350
3 &$1 D''5 RFM 0 1 C354
C0354 1 {1} 513 CAN-Bus OUT node addresses 2
1 ,1 $''5 1
2 287 $''5 129
3 ,1 $''5 257
4 287 $''5
258
5 ,1 $''5
385
6 287 $''5
386
C0355 g 0 {1} 2047 CAN bus identifier
1 ,1 ,'
2 287 ,'
3 ,1 ,'
4 287 ,'
5 ,1 ,'
6 287 ,'

11-28 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0356 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN bus time settings
1 &$1 %227 83 3000 1: CAN Boot-Up
2 287 EWEMF 0 2: CAN-OUT2 cycle
3 287 EWEMF 0 3: CAN-OUT3 cycle
4 &$1 '(/$< 20 4: CAN OUT 2/3 delay time
[C0357] 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN bus monitoring time for Iratedx
1 &(NO1JS SJNF 3000
2 &(NO1JS SJNF 3000
3 &(NO1JS SJNF 3000
C0358 0 0 no function Install CAN bus reset node

g
5FRFS 1O'F
1 CAN reset
C0359 &$1 RSDSF CAN bus status:
0 Operational
1 Pre-Operat
2 Warning

C0360 g 3
0
Bus off
{1} 65535 Telegram counter (number of telegrams, with
values > 65535 counting starts again at 0)
1 0FRRDHF 287 1: all sent
2 0FRRDHF ,1
2: all received
3 0FRRDHF 287
3: sent to CAN-OUT1
4 0FRRDHF 287
4: sent to CAN-OUT2
5 5: sent to CAN-OUT3
0FRRDHF 287
6 6: sent to parameter channel 1
0FRRDHF 3287
7 7: sent to parameter channel 2
0FRRDHF 3287
8 8: received from CAN-IN1
0FRRDHF ,1
9 9: received from CAN-IN2
0FRRDHF ,1
10 10: received from CAN-IN3
0FRRDHF ,1
11 11: received from parameter channel 1

g
0FRRDHF 3,1
12 12: received from parameter channel 2
0FRRDHF 3,1

C0361 0 {1 %} 100 CAN bus load


1 /OD' 287 • To ensure a perfect operation, the total bus
2 /OD' ,1 load (all connected devices) should be less
3 /OD' 287
than 80%
4 /OD' 287
1: all sent
5 2: all received
/OD' 287
6 3: sent to CAN-OUT1
/OD' 3287
7 4: sent to CAN-OUT2
/OD' 3287
8 5: sent to CAN-OUT3
/OD' ,1
9 6: sent to parameter channel 1
/OD' ,1
10 7: sent to parameter channel 2
/OD' ,1
11 8: received from CAN-IN1
/OD' 3,1
12 9: received from CAN-IN2
/OD' 3,1
10: received from CAN-IN3
11: received from parameter channel 1
12: received from parameter channel 2
C0362 6W1E EWEMF 1.000 -32.000 {1.000 ms} 32.000 Time between two sync telegrams on the
system bus
C0363 6W1E EO55 1 1 {1} 5 Correction value for C0362
1 0.8 µs
2 1.6 µs
3 2.4 µs
4 3.2 µs
5 4.0 µs
[C0364] &$1 DESJT 1000 see selection list 2 Pre-operat. after operat.
FIXED 0 Activate process data externally

C0365 &$1 DESJT g 0 1


Change over from pre-operation to operation
Pre-operat. after operat.
Input signal CAN active
C0366 6W1E 5FRPO1RF 1 0 no sync response CAN Sync Response
1 sync response
C0367 6W1E 5V ,' 128 1 {1} 256 CAN Sync Rx Identifier
C0368 6W1E 7V ,' 128 1 {1} 256 CAN Sync Tx Identifier

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-29


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0369
C0400
[C0402]
6W1E 7V 7JNF

287

OGGRFS
g
0 0
-199.99
{1}
{0,01 %}
65000
199.99
→ Selection list 1
CAN Sync Tx Time
Output of AIN1
Configuration offset of AIN1
19502 FCODE-26/1
[C0403] → Selection list 1 Configuration gain of AIN1

g
HDJ1
19504 FCODE-27/1
C0404 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Input signals of AIN1
1

g
OGGRFS
2 HDJ1

C0405 287 -199.99 {1 %} 199.99 Output of AIN2


[C0407] OGGRFS → Selection list 1 Configuration offset of AIN2
19503 FCODE-26/2
[C0408] → Selection list 1 Configuration gain of AIN2

g
HDJ1
19505 FCODE-27/2
C0409 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Input signals of AIN2
1 OGGRFS
2 HDJ1

[C0416] 5FROMTF5 D'K 0 0 {1} 99999999 Correction Resolver fault for Lenze motors
• Read resolver error from the nameplate
[C0420] (1EO'F5 EO1RS 512 1 {1 inc/rev} 8192 Encoder input (TTL)X8 / (HTL)X9
Encoder constant for encoder input X8 in
increments per revolution
[C0421] (1EO'F5 TOMS 5.00 5.0 {0.1} 8.0 Encoder voltage supply
Set supply voltage for the encoder used
CAUTION:
incorrect input may destroy the encoder
C0425 '),1 EO1RS 3 0 {1} 6 DF input; increment of the digital frequency
input
0 256 inc/rev
1 512 inc/rev
2 1024 inc/rev
3 2048 inc/rev
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev

C0426
C0427
287

'),1 G81LSJO1
g
0
-32767
0
{1 rpm}
{1}
32767
2
6 16384 inc/rev
Output signal of DFIN
Type of the digital frequency signal
0 2 phases
1 A puls / B dir
2 Puls A or B
C0429 73 'FMDW 0 -32767 {1 inc} 32767 TP5 delay
[C0431] J1 5001 MCTRL-NACT → Selection list 1 Input AOUT1
[C0432] OGGRFS 19512 FCODE-109/1 → Selection list 1 Offset AOUT1
[C0433]
C0434
1
HDJ1

&
g
19510 FCODE-108/1
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
Gain AOUT1
Display of C0431 ... C0433

2 &
3 &

[C0436] J1 5002 MCTRL-MSET2 → Selection list 1 Input AOUT2


[C0437] OGGRFS 19513 FCODE-109/2 → Selection list 1 Offset AOUT2
[C0438]
C0439
1
HDJ1

&
g
19511 FCODE-108/2
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→Selection list 1
199.99
Gain AOUT2
Display of C0436 ... C0438

2 &
3 &

[C0440]
C0441
C0443
67$7( %86

&

',*,1 287
g
1000

g 0 {1}
→ Selection list 2

255
Configuration state bus X5/ST
Display of C0440
Signals at X5/E1 to X5/E5, decimal value
• Binary interpretation indicates terminal

C0444 & g 0 1
signals
Display of C0118

11-30 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0450] 1V 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of BRK1
[C0451] O1 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Digital input of BRK1
[C0452]
C0458
1
RJH1

g
1000 FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
Configuration analog input of BRK1
Display of
&

g
&
2 & &

C0459
C0464
&

&8RSONF5 ,) g 0
1
original
changed
Display of C0451
Customer interface
Status of selected basic configuration
• Reassignment of terminals in a base
configuration from C0005 does not change
C0005 and sets C0464 = 1
• Adding or removing of function blocks or
changing the signal flow among the function
blocks in a basic configuration of C0005
sets C0005 = 0 and C0464= 1
[C0465] * See selection list 5 FB processing list
1 )% MJRS 200 Contained in the program of signal processing
2 )% MJRS 0 (sequence in which the function blocks are
3 50 processed)
4
)% MJRS

)% MJRS 0 Å depending on C0005


5 0 Change of C0005 loads assigned processing
)% MJRS
list
6
7
)% MJRS 55
0
Å Valid for C0005 = 1000
)% MJRS
• After changing the signal flow correct the
8 )% MJRS 0
processing list in every case. Otherwise, the
9 )% MJRS 10250 device may use wrong signals!
10 )% MJRS 0 • The function blocks DIGIN, DIGOUT, AIF-IN,
11 )% MJRS 0 CAN-IN, and MCTRL are always processed
12 )% MJRS 0 and do not have to be entered in the list.
13 )% MJRS 5650
14 )% MJRS 0
15 )% MJRS 0
16 )% MJRS 5050
...  0
19 )% MJRS 5700
...  0
22 )% MJRS 10650
...  0
25 )% MJRS 70
...  0
28 )% MJRS 75
...  0
31 )% MJRS 250
...  0
41 )% MJRS 25000
42 )% MJRS 20000
...  0
49 0

g
)% MJRS
50 )% MJRS 0
C0466 &38 7 5FNDJ1 Processing time
remaining for processing function blocks
[C0469] )&7 673 .(< 2 0 switched off Function key Stop (keypad)
1 Controller inhibit • Function is activated when pressing the
2 Quick stop STOP key.
C0470 0 0 {1} 255 Used for digital signals. The data words C0470
1 )&2'( %JS   and C0471 are in parallel and are identical.
2 )&2'( %JS 
3 )&2'( %JS  
4 )&2'( %JS  

C0471 )&2'(  %JS 0 0 {1} 4294967296 Used for digital signals. The data words C0470
and C0471 are in parallel and are identical.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-31


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0472 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Used for relative analog signals
1 )&2'( D1DMOH 0.00
2 )&2'( D1DMOH 0.00
3 )&2'( D1DMOH 100.00
... 
...
19 )&2'( D1DMOH
0.00
20 )&2'( D1DMOH
0.00
C0473 -32767 {1} 32767 Used for absolute analog signals
1 )&2'( D%R 1
2 )&2'( D%R 1
3 )&2'( D%R 0
... 
...
9 )&2'( D%R
0
10 )&2'( D%R
0
C0474 0 -2147483648 {1} 2147483648 FCODE phase
1 )&2'( 3+ Freely assignable code for phase signals
..  1 turn = 65536 inc
5 )&2'( 3+

C0475 0 -16000 {1 rpm} 16000 FCODE phase difference


1 )&2'( ') Used for phase difference signals
2 )&2'( ') 1 turn = 65536 inc
[C0490] )FF'%DEL POR 0 0 {1} 4 Position feedback system
0 Resolver at X7 • C0490 = 0, 1, 2 can be mixed with C0495
1 Encoder TTL at X8 = 0, 1, 2
2 Encoder sin at X8 • C0490 = 3, 4 sets C0495 to the same value
3 Absolute ST at X8
4 Absolute MT at X8
[C0495] )FF'%DEL 1 0 0 {1} 4 Speed feedback system
0 Resolver at X7 • C0495 = 0, 1, 2 can be mixed with C0490
1 Encoder TTL at X8 = 0, 1, 2
2 Encoder sin at X8 • C0495 = 3, 4 also sets C0490 to the same
3 Absolute ST at X8 value
4 Absolute MT at X8
C0497 1DES GJMSF5 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Nact-filter time constant
0 ms switched off Time constant for actual speed
C0517 0.00 {0.01} 1999.00 User menu with up to 32 entries
1 8RF5 NF18 51.00 C0051/0 MCTRL-NACT • Under the subcodes the numbers of the
2 8RF5 NF18 54.00 C0054/0 Imot desired codes are entered.
3 8RF5 NF18 56.00 C0056/0 MCTRL-MSET2 • The input is done in the format xxx.yy
4 8RF5 NF18 46.00 C0046/0 N – xxx: Code number
5 8RF5 NF18 49.00 C0049/0 NADD – yy: Subcode for code
6 8RF5 NF18 183.00 C0183/0 Diagnostics • It is not checked whether the entered code
7 168.01 C0168/1 Fail no. act exists.
8RF5 NF18
8 8RF5 NF18 86.00 C0086/0 Mot type
9 8RF5 NF18 22.00 C0022/0 Imax current
10 8RF5 NF18 5.00 C0005/0 Signal cfg
11 8RF5 NF18 11.00 C0011/0 Nmax
12 8RF5 NF18 12.00 C0012/0 Tir
13 8RF5 NF18 13.00 C0013/0 Tif
14 8RF5 NF18 105.00 C0105/0 QSP Tif
15 8RF5 NF18 39.01 C0039/1 JOG setpoint
16 8RF5 NF18 70.00 C0070/0 Vp speed CTRL
17 8RF5 NF18 71.00 C0071/0 Tn speed CTRL
18 8RF5 NF18 0 not assigned
...  0 not assigned
31 8RF5 NF18 94.00 C0094/0 Password
32 8RF5 NF18 3.00 C0003/0 Par save
[C0520] J1 1000 FIXEDPHI-0 → Selection list 4 Configuration input
[C0521] TP 'JT 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration gain factor numerator
[C0522] 5DS 'JT 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration gear factor numerator
[C0523] $ S5JN 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration phase trimming
[C0524] 1 S5JN 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Speed trimming of DFSET

11-32 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0525]  P8MRF 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Configuration one-time zero pulse activation
[C0526] 5(6(7 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 DFSET-RESET
Reset integrators
[C0527] 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Configuration - set integrators

g
RFS

C0528 -2.109 {1} 2.109 Display parameter


1  P8MRF $ Zero pulse phase difference
2 2GGRFS

C0529 08MSJP OGGRFS 1 -20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier


C0530 ') FTDM8DSJO1 0 0 {1} 1 DF evaluation
0 with factor
1 no factor
C0531 $ES  'JT 1 1 {1} 16384 Actual zero pulse divider
C0532  P8MRF73 1 1 {1} 2 DFSET zero pulse/touch probe
Selection of zero pulse or touch probe
1 0-pulse
2 Touch probe
C0533 9P 'F1ON 1 1 {1} 32767 DFSET Vp denominator
Gain factor denominator
C0534  P8MRF GES 0 0 {1} 13 DFSET zero pulse function
0 Inactive
1 Continuous
2 Cont. switch
10 Once,fast way
11 Once, CW
12 Once, CCW
13 Once,2*0-pulse
C0535
C0536
1
6FS  'JT

TP 'JT
g
1 1
-32767
{1}
{1}
16384
32767
DFSET set zero pulse divider
Absolute analog input signals

g
5DS 'JT
3 $ S5JN

C0537
C0538
1
1 S5JN

 P8MRF
g -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Relative analog input signal
digital input signals

g
5FRFS
3 RFS

C0539 J1 -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Input signal


[C0540] )81ESJO1 1 0 {1} 5 Function of the encoder outputs
0 Analog input
1 PH diff input
2 RES+ int 0
3 RES+ ext 0
4 X10 = X9
5 X10 = X8
[C0541] D1 J1 5001 MCTRL-NACT → Selection list 1 Of the analog input of DFOUT
[C0542] ') ,1 1000 FIXEDPHI 0 → Selection list 4 Configuration of the dig. frequency input
[C0544] RW1 5'W 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Synchronisation signal for the zero pulse
C0545 :J1LFMOGGRFS 0 0 {1 inc} 65535 DFOUT phase offset
C0546
C0547
0J1 J1E5FT

& g
1000

g
-245760000
-199.99
{1inc}
{0.01 %}
245760000
199.99
Min. incr. per rev.
Display of C0541
C0548
C0549
C0560
&

&

)JVROMMUF5SF
g 0
-32767
-199.99
{1 rpm}
{0.01 %}
32767
199.99
1 Display of C0544
Display of C0542
FIXSET1 Fixed setpoints
1 100.00
2 75.00
3 50.00
4 25.00
5 0
.. ..
15 0

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-33


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0561] $,1 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of FIXSET1
[C0562] 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Configuration of digital inputs
1 J1
2 J1
3

g
J1
4 J1

C0563
C0564
[C0570]
&

&

,1
g
1000
-199.99

FIXED 0 %
{0.01 %} 199.99

→ Selection list 1
Display of C0561
Display of C0562
Configuration analog input of S&H1
[C0571]
C0572
C0573
MOD'

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED 0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input of S&H1
Display of C0570
Display of C0571
C0577 9P GM' UFDL 3.0 0.00 {0.01 ms} 15.99 Field weakening controller gain Vp
C0578 71 GM' UFDL 10 2.0 {0.1 ms} 8192.0 Field weakening controller adjustment time Tn
8000 ms switched off
C0581 021,7 ((5 0 0 Trip Configuration monitoring EEr (external fault)
1 Message
2 Warning
3 Off
C0582 021,7 2+ 2 2 Warning Configuration monitoring OH4 (heat sink
3 Off temperature)
C0583 021,7 2+ * 0 Trip Configuration monitoring OH3 (motor
3 Off temperature fixed)
Å depends on C0086
C0584 021,7 2+ * 2 Warning Configuration monitoring OH7 (motor
3 Off temperature adjustable)
Å depends on C0086
Temperature monitoring via resolver input
C0585 021,7 2+ 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring OH8 (motor
2 Warning temperature adjustable)
3 Off Temperature monitoring via PTC input
C0586 021,7 6' 0 0 Trip Configuration monitoring SD2 (resolver)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0587 021,7 6' 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring SD3 (encoder at X9)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0588 021,7 ++ 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring H10 and H11 (thermal
2 Warning sensors in the controller)
3 Off
C0589 021,7 3 2 0 Trip Configuration monitoring P03 (contouring error)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0590 021,7 3 0 0 Trip Configuration monitoring P13 (phase error)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0591 021,7 &( 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring CE1 (CAN-IN1 fault)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0592 021,7 &( 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring CE2 (CAN-IN2 fault)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0593 021,7 &( 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring CE3 (CAN-IN3 fault)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0594 021,7 6' * 0 Trip Configuration monitoring SD6 (motor
2 Warning temperature sensor)
3 Off Å depends on C0086
C0595 021,7 &( 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring CE4 (CAN bus off)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0596 1NDV MJNJS 5500 0 {1 rpm} 16000 Monitoring: Speed of the machine

11-34 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0597 021,7 /3 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring motor phase failure
2 Warning
3 Off
C0598 021,7 6' 3 0 Trip Configuration monitoring master current at
2 Warning X5/1.2 < 2mA
3 Off
C0599 /JNJS /3  5.0 1.0 {0.1} 10.0 Current limit for motor phase failure monitoring
C0600 $5,7 G81ES 1 0 {1} 5 ARIT2 function
0 OUT = IN1
1 IN1 + IN2
2 IN1 - IN2
3 IN1 * IN2
4 IN1 / IN2
5 IN1/(100% - IN2)
[C0601] 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Analog inputs of ARIT2
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C0602 & -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Display of C0601


[C0610] 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Adds inputs IN1, IN2 and IN3
1 ,1
2

g
,1
3 ,1

C0611 &   -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99


C0620 '% HDJ1 1.00 -10.00 {0.01} 10.00 Gain dead band component DB1
C0621 '% TDM8F 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Dead band of DB1
[C0622]
C0623
C0630
J1

&

0DV MJNJS
g
1000

100.00
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
-199.99
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
199.99
Configuration analog input of DB1
Display of C0622
Upper limit of limiter LIM1
C0631 0J1 MJNJS -100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit of limiter LIM1
[C0632]
C0633
C0640
J1

&

'FMDW 7
g
1000

20.00
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
0.01
{0.01 %}
{0.01 s}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
50.00
Configuration analog input of LIM1
Display of C0632
Time constant of the PT1-1 component
[C0641]
C0642
C0650
,1

&

'7  HDJ1
g
1000

1.00
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
-320.00
{0.01 %}
{0.01}
Å Selection list 1
199.99
320.00
Configuration analog input of PT1-1

Gain of DT1-1 component


C0651 'FMDW 7 1.00 0.005 {0.001 s} 5.000 Time constant of DT1-1
[C0652] J1 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of DT1-1
C0653 6F1RJ%JMJSW 1 1 {1} 7 Input sensitivity of DT1-1
1 15-bit
2 14-bit
3 13-bit
4 12-bit
5 11-bit
6 10-bit

C0654
C0655
J1

18NF5DSO5
g
1
7
-199.99
-32767
9-bit
{0.01 %}
{1}
199.99
32767
Analog input signal of DT1-1
CONV5 Numerator
C0656 'F1ONJ1DSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV5 Denominator
[C0657]
C0658
J1

& g
1000 FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
Configuration analog input of CONV5
Display of C0657
[C0661]
C0662
C0671
J1

&

5)* 7J5
g
1000

0.000
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
0.000
{0.01 %}
{0.01 s}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
999.900
Analog input absolute value generator
Display of C0661
Acceleration time Tir of ramp function
generator RFG1
C0672 5)* 7JG 0.000 0.001 {0.01 s} 999.990 Deceleration time Tif of RFG1
[C0673] J1 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of RFG1
[C0674] RFS 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration set input of RFG1
[C0675] MOD' 1000 FIXED 0 → Selection list 2 Digital input of RFG1

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-35


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0676
1
g
Lenze Choice
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Display of
C0673

g
&
2 & C0674
C0677 & Display of C0675
C0680 )81ESJO1 6 1 {1} 6 CMP1 comparator function
Compares the inputs IN1 and IN2
1 IN1 = IN 2
2 IN 1 > IN2
3 IN 1 < IN2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0681 +WRSF5FRJR 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 % Hysteresis of CMP1
C0682 :J1'OU 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP1
[C0683] → Selection list 1 Configuration analog inputs of CMP1
1 5001 MCTRL-NACT

g
,1
2 ,1 19500 FCODE-17
C0684 & -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Display of C0683
C0685 )81ESJO1 00001 1 {1} 6 CMP2 Comparison function
1 IN1 = IN2
2 IN1 > IN2
3 IN1 < IN2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0686 +WRSF5FRJR 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2 Hysteresis
C0687 :J1'OU 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2 window
[C0688] 1000 FIXED 0% → Selection list 1 Configuration analog inputs of CMP2
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C0689 & -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Display of C0688


C0690 )81ESJO1 1 1 {1} 6 CMP3 comparator function
Compares the inputs IN1 and IN2
1 IN1 = IN 2
2 IN 1 > IN2
3 IN 1 < IN2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0691 +WRSF5FRJR 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 % CMP3 hysteresis
C0692 :J1'OU 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 % CMP3 window
[C0693] 1000 FIXED 0% → Selection list 1 Configuration analog inputs of CMP3
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C0694 & -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Display of C0693


C0695 )81ESJO1 2 1 {1} 2 Function comparator for phase signals PHCMP1
Compares the inputs IN1 and IN2
1 IN 1 < IN2
2 |IN1| < |IN2|
[C0697] 1000 FIXED 0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration phase inputs of PHCMP1
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C0698 & -2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Display of C0697


[C0700]
C0701
J1

& g
19523 FCODE-472/3
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
Input ANEG1
Display of C0700
[C0703]
C0704
C0710
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

0
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
0
{0.01 %}
{1}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
2
Input ANEG2
Display of C0703
Transition evaluation TRANS1
0 Rising trans
1 Falling trans
2 Both trans

11-36 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0711 38MRF 7 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Pulse time of TRANS1
[C0713]
C0714
C0715
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

0 0
FIXED 0

{1}
→ Selection list 2

2
Digital input of TRANS1
Display of C0713
Transition evaluation TRANS2
0 Rising trans
1 Falling trans
2 Both trans
C0716 38MRF 7 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Pulse time of TRANS2
[C0718]
C0719
C0720
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

2
FIXED 0

0 {1}
→ Selection list 2

2
Digital input of TRANS2
Display of C0718
DIGDEL1 function
0 On delay
1 Off delay
2 On/Off delay
C0721 'FMDW 7 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 DIGDEL1 delay time
[C0723]
C0724
C0725
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

2
FIXED 0

0 {1}
→ Selection list 2

2
Digital input of DIGDEL1
Display of C0723
Selection of the function
0 ON delay
1 OFF delay
2 ON/OFF delay
C0726 'FMDW 7 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Delay time DIGDEL2
[C0728]
C0729
C0730
J1

&

0O'8R
g
1000

0
FIXED0

0 {1}
→ Selection list 2

1
Digital input
Display of C0728
Start / stop of the measuring value recording
0 Start measurement

C0731 6SDS8R g 0 {1} 5


1 Stop measurement
Actual operating status
0 Measurement completed
1 Measurement active
2 Trigger detected
3 Cancel
4 Cancel after trigger
5 Read memory
[C0732] 1000 FIXED0% →Selection list 1 Configuration analog inputs
1 .D1DM
2 .D1DM
3 .D1DM
4 .D1DM

[C0733] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 OSC trigger input


1 'JH 75JHHF5 Configuration trigger input
C0734 75JHHF5 48FMMF 0 0 {1} 4 Selection of trigger source
0 dig. trigger input
1 Channel 1
2 Channel 2
3 Channel 3
4 Channel 4
C0735 75JHHF5 3FHFM 0 -32767 {1} 32767 Adjust trigger level to channel 1 ... 4
C0736 75JHHF5 )MD1LF 0 0 {1} 1 Selection of trigger signal
0 LOW/HIGH transition
1 HIGH/LOW transition
C0737 75JHHF5 'FMDW 0.0 -100.0 {0.1 %} 999.99 Setting of pretriggering and posttriggering

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-37


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0738 $%SDRSPF5JO'F 3 3 {1} 21 Selection of the scanning period
3 1 ms
4 2 ms
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 20 ms
8 50 msec
9 100 ms
10 200 ms
11 500 ms
12 1s
13 2 sec
14 5s
15 10 s
16 20 s
17 50 s
18 1 min
19 2 min
20 5 min
21 10 min
C0739 .D1DMD1XDIM 4 1 {1} 4 Number of channels to be measured
C0740 Selection of a memory block
1 6SD5S 0 0 {1} 65535 Determine the start point for reading the data
memory
2 )5FJ6PF55F1 0 0 {1} 65535 The data memory must be enabled for reading

g
0 Data reading inhibited
1 Data reading enabled
C0741 1 Version
1 9F5RJO1 2 Memory space
2 *5w„F 6PFJEIF5 3 Data width
3 'DSF1%5FJSF 4 Number of channels
4

g
$1XDIM .D1gMF

C0742 /(1*7+ 2) '% 0 0 {1} 65536 Data block length of OSC


C0743 5($' '% Read data block length
Reading an 8 byte data block
C0744 6PFJEIF5H5w„F 2048 0 {1} 6 Adapt memory capacity to the measurement
task
0 512
1 1024
2 1536
3 2048
4 3072
5 4096

C0749
1 ,1'FV $%%58EI
g 0 {1} 65536
6 8192
Abort index in memory

2 ,1'FV 75JHHF5
3 ,1'FV (1'F

11-38 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0750 9P 'F1ON 16 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 128 / 256 / 512 / 1024 / 2048 / DFRFG1 Vp denominator position
4096 / 8192 / 16384 Denominator of the position controller gain
1 Vp = 1
2 Vp = 1/2
4 Vp = 1/4
8 Vp = 1/8
16 Vp = 1/16
32 Vp = 1/32
64 Vp = 1/64
128 Vp = 1/128
256 Vp = 1/256
512 Vp = 1/512
1024 Vp = 1/1024
2048 Vp = 1/2048
4096 Vp = 1/4096
8192 Vp = 1/8192
16384 Vp = 1/16384
C0751 ')5)* 7J5 1.000 0.001 {0.001s} 999.900 DFRFG1 Tir (acceleration time)
C0752 0DV RPFF' 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 DFRFG1 max. speed
here: maximum make-up speed
C0753 ')5)* 463 0.000 0.000 {0.001s} 999.900 QSP-Tif, deceleration time when deceleration
ramp is activated
C0754 3+ F55O5 2.109 10 {1} 2.109 DFRFG1 contouring error
C0755 6W1 UJ1'OU 100 0 {1 inc} 65535 Synchronization window
C0756 2GGRFS 0 -1.109 {1 inc} /1.109 Offset
C0757 )81ESJO1 0 0/1 0 No TP start
1 With TP start
[C0758] J1 1000 FIXEDPHI-0 → Selection list 4 Configuration phase input
[C0759] QRP 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input (control QSP)
[C0760] RSOP 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input (ramp function generator stop)
[C0761]
C0764
1
5FRFS

&
g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input (reset integrators)
Display of
C0759
2 C0760

g
&
3 & C0761
C0765 & -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Display of C0758
C0766 '5FI5JEIS81H 1 1 {1} 3 1 Direction of rotation CW/CCW
2 CW rotation
3 CCW rotation
[C0770] ' 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Data input of FLIP1
[C0771] EML 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration clock input of FLIP1
[C0772]
C0773
1
EM5

&
g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration reset input of FLIP1
Display of
C0770
2 & C0771
3 & C0772
[C0775] ' 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Data input of FLIP2
[C0776] EML 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration clock input of FLIP2
[C0777]
C0778
1
EM5

&
g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration reset input of FLIP2
Display of
C0775
2 & C0776
3 E C0777
[C0780] 1 50 AIN1-OUT → Selection list 1 Configuration main setpoint input
[C0781] 1 ,19 10251 R/L/Q-R/L → Selection list 2 Configuration main setpoint inversion
[C0782] 1D'' 5650 ASW1-OUT → Selection list 1 Configuration additional setpoint input
[C0783] 1D'' ,19 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration additional setpoint inversion
[C0784] EJ1I TDM 5001 MCTRL-NACT → Selection list 1 Configuration output signal with controller
inhibit
[C0785] RFS 5000 MCTRL-NSET2 → Selection list 1 Configuration ramp function generator

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-39


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0786] MOD' 5001 MCTRL-QSP-OUT → Selection list 2 Digital input (load ramp function generator)
[C0787] → Selection list 2 Configuration JOG selection and JOG activation
1 KOH  53 DIGIN3 Binary interpretation
2 KOH  1000 FIXED0
3 KOH  1000 FIXED0
4 KOH 
1000 FIXED0
[C0788] → Selection list 2 Configuration Ti selection and Ti activation
1 SJ  1000 FIXED0 • Binary interpretation
2 SJ  1000 FIXED0 • Tir and Tif pairs are identical
3 SJ  1000 FIXED0
4 SJ 
1000 FIXED0
[C0789] 5GH  1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input (ramp function generator 0)
[C0790]
C0798
1
5GH RSOP

g
1000 FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input (ramp function generator stop)
analog input signals

g
EJ1I TDM
2 RFS

C0799 Display digital input signals of NSET


1 1 J1T
2 1D'' J1T
3 MOD'
4 KOH 
5 KOH 
6 KOH 
7 KOH 
8 SJ 
9 SJ 
10 SJ 

11 SJ 

12 'JR 5GH 

13 5GH RSOP

[C0800] RFS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration setpoint input


[C0801] DES 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration actual value input
[C0802] J1GM8 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration evaluation input
[C0803] D'DPS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration adaptation input
[C0804] J1DES 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration inactivation input
[C0805]
C0808
1
J OGG

&
g
1000 FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input (switch-off I component)
Display of
&

2 & &
3 &

g
&
4 & &

C0809 Display of
1 & C0804
2 & C0805
[C0810] → Selection list 1 Analog inputs ASW1
1 J1 55 AIN2-OUT
2 J1 1000 FIXED0%
[C0811]
C0812
C0813
RFS

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input ASW1
Display of C0810
Display of C0811
[C0815] FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Analog input ASW2
1 ,1 1000
2 ,1 1000
[C0816]
C0817
C0818
6(7

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01%}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input ASW2
Display of C0815
Display of C0816
[C0820] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs AND1
1 J1
2 J1
3 J1

11-40 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0821
[C0822]
& g
Lenze

1000
Choice

FIXED0 → Selection list 2


Display of C0820
Digital inputs AND2
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0823 & Display of C0822


[C0824] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs AND3
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0825 & Display of C0824


[C0826] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs AND4
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0827 & Display of C0826


[C0828] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs AND5
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0829 & Display of C0828


[C0830] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs OR1
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0831 & Display of C0830


[C0832] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs OR2
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0833 & Display of C0832


[C0834] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs of the OR element OR3
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0835 & Display of C0834


[C0836] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs of the OR element OR4
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0837 & Display of C0836


[C0838] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs of the OR element OR5
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C0839 & Display of C0838


[C0840]
C0841
J1

& g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input NOT1
Display of C0840
[C0842]
C0843
J1

& g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input NOT2
Display of C0842
[C0844]
C0845
J1

& g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input NOT3
Display of C0844
[C0846]
C0847
J1

& g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input NOT4
Display of C0846
[C0848]
C0849
J1

& g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital input NOT5
Display of C0848

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-41


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0850] 1000 FIXED 0 % → Selection list 1 Configuration process output words for
1 O8S: automation interface AIF (X1)
2 28S:
3 O8S:

[C0851] O8S' 1000 FIXED 0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration 32-bit phase information
C0852 7WPF 287: 0 0 Analog signal AIF signal type AIF-OUT.W2
1 Digital 0-15 Configuration process output word 2 for
2 Low phase automation interface AIF (X1)
3 High phase
C0853 7WPF 287: 0 0 Analog signal AIF signal type AIF-OUT.W3
1 Digital 16-31 Configuration process output word 3 for
2 High phase automation interface AIF (X1)

g
C0854 7WPF 287: 0 0 Analog signal Configuration process output word 1 for
3 D2: Low phase automation interface AIF (X1)
C0855 Bit 00 {1} Bit 15 Process input words hexadecimal for

g
J1  

J1   automation interface X1


C0856 -199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 Process input words decimal
1 J1: Display: 100% = 16384
2

g
J1:
3 J1:

C0857
C0858
1
J1'

O8S:
g -2147483648
-199.99
{1}
{0.01 %}
2147483647
199.99
32-bit phase information
Process output words
Display: 100% = 16384
2

g
O8S:
3 O8S:

C0859 O8S' -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information


[C0860] 1000 → Selection list 1
1 287:
2 287:
3 287:
4 287:
5 287:

6 287:

7 287:

8 287:

9 287:

10 287:

11 287:

[C0861] 1000 → Selection list 3


1 287'
2

g
287'
3 287'

C0863 0 1 Display parameter


1 ,1 'JH IN1 (0-15)
2 ,1 'JH CAN-IN1 (digital 1-16)
3 ,1 'JH
4 ,1 'JH
5 ,1 'JH
6 ,1 'JH

C0864 Signal type CAN-OUT.W1/3


1 7WPF 287: 0 0 analog sign Configuration process output words for system
2 7WPF 287: 0 1 digital 0-15 bus (CAN)
3 7WPF 287: 0 2 low phase
C0865 Signal type CAN-OUT.W2/4
1 7WPF 287: 0 0 analog sign Configuration process output words for system
2 7WPF 287: 0 1 digital 16-31 bus (CAN)
3 7WPF 287: 0 2 high phase

11-42 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C0866
1 ,1:
g
Lenze Choice
-32768.00 {0.01%} 32767.00 Display parameter
CAN-IN1.W1 (analog)
2 ,1:
3 ,1:
4 ,1:
5 ,1:

6 ,1:

7 ,1:

8 ,1:

9 ,1:

10

g
,1:

11 ,1:

C0867 Display parameter


1 ,1' CAN-IN1.D1(angle)
2

g
,1'
3 ,1'

C0868 -199.99 {0.01%} 199.99


1 287:
2 287:
3 287:
4 287:
5 287:

6 287:

7 287:

8 287:

9 287:

10

g
287:

11 287:

C0869 -2147483648/ {1} 2147483647 Display: CAN OUT1/OUT2.Dx (angle)


1 287'
2 287'
3 287'

[C0870] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs (inhibit controller)


1 &J1+
2 &J1+

[C0871] 75,3 RFS 54 DIGIN 4 → Selection list 2 Digital input (TRIP set) of DCTRL
[C0876]
C0878
1
75,3 5FR

&
g
55 DIGIN 5 → Selection list 2 Digital input (TRIP reset) of DCTRL
Display of
C0870 /1 /2
2 & C0871
3 & C0876
4 &

C0879 0 0 {1} 1 Reset control words


1 5FRFS & 0 no reset
2 5FRFS $,) 1 reset
3 5FRFS &$1

C0880 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Parameter set selection


1 3$5 
2 3$5 

C0881
C0884
1
3$5 /2$'

3$5 
g
1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Load parameter set

2 3$5 
3 3$5 /2$'

[C0885] 5 51 DIGIN 1 → Selection list 2 Digital input (CW rotation) of R/L/Q


[C0886]
C0889
1
M

&
g
52 DIGIN 2 → Selection list 2 Digital input (CCW rotation) of R/L/Q
Display of
C0885
2 & C0886

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-43


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C0890] 1 RFS → Selection list 1 Speed setpoint input
5050 NSET-NOUT
[C0891] 0 D'' 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration torque setpoint input
[C0892] MO 0 MJN 5700 ANEG1-OUT → Selection list 1 Configuration lower torque limit
[C0893] IJ 0 MJN 19523 FCODE-472/3 → Selection list 1 Configuration upper torque limit
[C0894] PIJ RFS 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration rotor position setpoint
[C0895] PIJ MJN 1006 FIXED100% → Selection list 1 Configuration phase controller limit
[C0896] 1 MJN 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration 2nd speed limit value
[C0897] PIJ O1 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Configuration switch-on signal phase controller
[C0898] GM' UFDL 1006 FIXED100% → Selection list 1 Signal for field weakening
[C0899] 1N RUS 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Changeover between n and M control
[C0900] QRP 10250 R/L/Q-QSP → Selection list 2 Control signal for release
[C0901] J RFS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Load I-component of the speed controller
[C0902] J MOD' 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Trigger signal for loading I component of speed
controller
[C0903]
C0906
1
3 $'$37

1 RFS
g
1006 FIXED0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
MCTRL-BOOST Adaptation phase controller
Analog input signals of MCTRL

2 N D''
3 MO N MJN
4 IJ N MJN
5 PIJ MJN

6 1 MJN

7 GM' UFDL

g
J RFS

9 3 $'$37

C0907 digital input signals


1 PIJ O1
2 10 RUS
3

g
QRP
4 J MOD'

C0908 PIJ RFS -2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 Set phase signal


• 1 turn = 65536 inc
C0909 RPFF' MJNJS 1 1 {1} 2 Limitation of direction of rotation for the speed
setpoint
1 + /- 175 %
2 0 .. + 175 %
3 -175 .. 0 %
[C0920] O1 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Activation input homing
[C0921] ND5L 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital reference switch
[C0922] PIJ J1 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Phase input
[C0923] 1 J1 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Speed input
[C0924] 326 /2$' 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Control ”set position”
[C0925]
C0926
1
$&7326 ,

&
g
1000 FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1 inc}
→ Selection list 3
2147483647
Position ”set position”
Display of
1. C0925
2 & 2. C0922
3 3. Actual position

g
$&7326
4 7$5*(7
4. Target position
C0927 Display of
1 & 1. C0920
2 2. C0921

g
&
3 /2$' 3. C0924
C0928 -2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 Phase signal (contouring error) of REF

g
&
• 1 turn = 65536 inc
C0929 & -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog input signal
[C0930] *FD5%OV NOS 1 1 {1} 65535 Gearbox factor (numerator)
[C0931] *FD5%OV F1E 1 1 {1} 65535 Gearbox factor (denominator)

11-44 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0932 5() NO'F 0 Homing mode
0 Mode 0
1 Mode 1
6 Mode 6
7 Mode 7
8 Mode 8
9 Mode 9
20 Mode 20
21 Mode 21
C0933 5() S5D1R 0 Reference signal transition
0 Rising trans rising transition
1 Falling trans falling transition
C0934 5() OGGRFS 0 -2140000000 {1 inc} 2140000000 Home position offset
C0935 5() RPFF' 2.0000 0.0001 {0.0001 % Nmax} 100.0000 Homing speed
C0936 5() 7J 1.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 990.00 Ti time homing
• Tir and Tif are identical
C0940 18NF5DSO5 1 -32767 {1} 32767 CONV1 Numerator
C0941 'F1ONJSDSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV1 Denominator
[C0942]
C0943
C0945
J1

&

18NF5DSO5
g
1000

1
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
-32767
{0.01 %}
{1}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
32767
Configuration analog input CONV1
Display of C0942
CONV2 numerator
C0946 'F1ONJ1DSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV2 denominator
[C0947]
C0948
C0950
J1

&

18NF5DSO5
g
1000

1
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
-32767
{0.01 %}
{1}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
32767
Configuration analog input CONV2
Display of C0947
CONV3 numerator
C0951 'F1ONJ1DSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV3 denominator
[C0952]
C0953
C0955
J1

&

18NF5DSO5
g
1000

1
FIXEDPHI0
-32767
-32767
{1 rpm}
{1}
→Selection list 4
32767
32767
Configuration analog input CONV3
Display of C0952
CONV4 numerator
C0956 'F1ONJ1DSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV4 denominator
[C0957]
C0958
C0960
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

1
FIXEDPHI0
-32767
1
{1 rpm}
{1}
→ Selection list 4
32767
3
Configuration analog input CONV4
Display of C0957
Function
1 Characteristic 1
2 Characteristic 2
3 Characteristic 3
C0961 W 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0962 W 50.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0963 W 75.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0964 W 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0965 V 50.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99
C0966 V 75.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99
[C0967]
C0968
[C0970]
J1

&

1 RFS
g
1000

1000
FIXED0%
-199.99
FIXED0%
{0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
→ Selection list 1
Characteristic CURVE1-IN
Display of C0967
Speed input of the mains failure control
Setpoint path
[C0971] GD8MS 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Input mains failure detected, input for
activation
[C0972] 5FRFS 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Reset input mains failure control
[C0973] D'DPS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Adaptation of P-gain of the voltage controller
[C0974] EO1RS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Adaptation of P-gain of the voltage controller
[C0975] SI5FRI/' 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Restart protection when the value falls below
the speed threshold
[C0976] 1DES 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Comparison of threshold function
• Start for V2 controller
[C0977] RFS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Speed start value
[C0978] 'E RFS 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Setpoint DC-bus voltage
C0980 9P 0.500 0.001 {0.001} 31.000 MFAIL Vp (gain)
C0981 71 100 20 {0.1 ms} 2000 MFAIL Tn (adjustment time)

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-45


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C0982 7J5 2.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 16.000 MFAIL Tir (acceleration time)
C0983
C0988
1
7

&
g
1.000 0.001
-199.99
{0.001 s}
{0.01 %}
60.000
199.99
MFAIL retrigger time
Display of
&

2 & &

3 & &

4 & &

5 & &

6 &

g
&

7 & &

C0989 Display of
1 & C0971
2 & C0972
[C0990] J1 1000 FIXEDPHI0 → Selection list 4 Input phase integrator PHINT1
[C0991]
C0992
C0993
5FRFS

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-32767 {1}
→Selection list 2
32767
Reset input of PHINT1
Display of C0990
Display of C0991
C0995 7FJMGDLSO5 0 -31 {1} 31
[C0996]
C0997
C1000
J1

&

'JTJRJO1
g
1000

1
FIXED0INC
-2147483647
0
{1}
{1}
→ Selection list 3
2147483647
31
Configuration input phase division PHDIV1
Display of C0996
Factor
[C1001]
C1002
C1010
,1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

1
FIXED0INC
-2147483647
0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 14 / 21 / 22
{1}
→ Selection list 3
2147483647
Configuration input of CONVPHA1
Display of C1001
Function of ARITPH1
0 OUT = IN1
1 IN1 + IN2
2 IN1 - IN2
3 IN1 * IN2
14 IN1 / IN2
21 IN1 + IN2 (no limit)
22 IN1 - IN2 (no limit)
[C1011] 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Inputs ARITPH1
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C1012 & -2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Display of C1011


[C1030] ,1 1000 FIXEDPHI0 → Selection list 4 Input PHINT2

[C1031]
C1032
C1033
5FRFS

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-32767 {1}
→ Selection list 2
32767
Reset input of PHINT2
Display of C1030
Display of C1031
C1040 $EEFMD5DSJO1 100.00 0.001 {0.001} 5000.000 Acceleration of SRFG1
C1041 -F5L 0.200 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 SRFG1 rounding time
Adjust jolt of SRFG1
[C1042] ,1 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration input of SRFG1
[C1043] 6(7 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration input of SRFG1
[C1044]
C1045
1
/2$'

g
1000 FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input of SRFG1
Display of
C1042

g
&
2 C1043

g
&

C1046 & Display of C1044


C1090 28SP8S RJH1DM -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Output signal of FEVAN1
C1091 &O'F 141 2 {1} 2000 FEVAN1 Code
C1092 68%EO'F 0 0 {1} 255 FEVAN1 Subcode
C1093 18NF5DSO5 1.0000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1 numerator
C1094 'F1ONJDSO5 0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1 denominator
C1095 2GGRFS 0 0 {1} 1000000000 FEVAN1 Offset
[C1096] ,1 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of FEVAN1
[C1097]
C1098
/2$'

& g
1000 FIXED0
-32768 {1}
→ Selection list 2
32767
Digital inputs of FEVAN1
Display of C1096

11-46 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C1099
C1100
&

)81LSJO1
g
Lenze

1 1
Choice

{1} 2
Display of C1097
1 Return
2 Hold
[C1101] 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration analog inputs
1 /' 9$/
2 &03 9$/

[C1102] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs


1 &/.83
2

g
&/.':1
3 /2$'

C1103
C1104
C1120
&

&

6W1E NO'F
g
2
-32768

0
{1}

{1}
32768

2
Display of C1101
Display of C1102
Function
0 off
1 CAN sync
2 Terminal sync
[C1121] 2 0 {1 ms} 13 • The interpolation is started with every sync
6W1E EWEMF signal
,1SF5POM EWEM 1. Definition for the cycle time of sync signals
(slave); for SYSTEMBUS only
2. Definition of the interpolation time between
the sync signals (in the slave), only for
terminal
C1122 6W1E SJNF 0.460 0.000 {0.001 ms} 10.000 Phase shift between the CAN sync and internal
control program cycle
• for SYSTEMBUS only
• depends on baud rate and bus load
C1123 0.000 1. Phase shift between terminal synch and
1 3IDRFRIJGS -0.450 {0.001 ms} 0.450 internal program cycle, for terminal sync
2 6W1E :J1'OU -1.000 {0.001 ms} 1.000 only
2. Window for the synchronisation signal of the
terminal synch (LOW/HIGH transition); for
terminal sync only
• activates when the sync start window is quit
[C1124] ,1 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 input
[C1125] ,1 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 input
[C1126]
C1127
,1

& g
1000

g
FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1}
→ Selection list 3
2147483647
input
Display of C1124
C1128
C1129
C1140
&

&

)81ESJO1
g
0
-2147483647
-2147483647
0
{1}
{1}
{1}
2147483647
2147483647
2
Display of C1125
Display of C1126
Transition evaluation TRANS3
0 Rising trans
1 Falling trans
2 Both trans
C1141 38MRF 7 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Pulse time of TRANS3
[C1143]
C1144
C1145
J1

&

)81LSJO1
g
1000

0
FIXED 0

0 {1}
→ Selection list 2

2
Digital input of TRANS3
Display of C1143
0 rising transition
1 falling transition
2 both transitions
C1146 ,NP8MR'D8F5 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000
[C1148]
C1149
C1150
J1

&

)81ESJO1
g
1000

0
FIXED 0

0 Load perm
→ Selection list 2 Digital input of TRANS4
Display of C1148
Function of PHINT3
1 Load edge
2 Cmp & sub
C1151 &NP TDM8F 2⋅109 0 {1} 2000000000 Comparison value of PHINT3
[C1153] J1 1000 FIXEDPHI0 → Selection list 4 Input phase integrator PHINT3
[C1154] /OD' 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Input of PHINT3
[C1155]
C1157
6(7

& g
1000 FIXED0INC
-32767 {1}
→ Selection list 3
32767
Input of PHINT3
Display of C1153

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-47


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important

C1158
C1159
&

&
g
Lenze

g
Choice

-2147483647 {1} 2147483647


Display of C1154
Display of C1155
[C1160] 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Analog inputs ASW3
1 ,1
2 ,1

[C1161]
C1162
C1163
6(7

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input ASW3
Display of C1160
Display of C1161
[C1165] 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Analog inputs ASW4
1 ,1
2 ,1

[C1166]
C1167
C1168
6(7

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 2
199.99
Digital input ASW4
Display of C1165
Display of C1166
C1170 18NF5DSO5 1 -32767 {1} 32767 Numerator for CONV6
C1171 'F1ONJ1DSO5 1 1 {1} 32767 Denominator for CONV6
[C1172]
C1173
[C1175]
J1

& g
1000

1000
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
FIXED0
{0.01 %}
→ Selection list 1
199.99
→ Selection list 2
Configuration analog input of CONV6
Display of C1172
Digital inputs AND6
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C1176 & Display of C1175


[C1178] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs AND7
1 J1
2

g
J1
3 J1

C1179 & Display of C1178


C1190 0OS 37& 6FM 0 0 standard PTC selection for motor
1 Characterist.
C1191 0 {1 °C} 255 Selection of PTC temperature characteristic
1 &ID5 SFNP  100
2 &ID5 SFNP  150
C1192 0 {1 Ω} 30000 Selection of PTC resistance characteristic
1 &ID5 2+0  1670
2 &ID5 2+0  2225
[C1195] → Selection list 3 Input phase signal AIF-OUT

g
287'
1000 FIXED0INC
C1196
C1197
[C1200]
287'

,1' g
1000
-2147483647
-2147483647
FIXED0INC
{1}
{1}
2147483647
2147483647
→ Selection list 3
Input signal of AIF-OUT
Input signal of AIF-IN
Configuration input of PHADD1
1 ,1
2

g
,1
3 ,1

C1201 & -2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Display of C1200


[C1205] 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration inputs of PHCMP2
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C1206 & -2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Display of C1205


C1207 )81ESJO1 3+&03 2 1 {1} 2 Function of PHCMP2
1 IN1 < IN2
2 |IN1| < |IN2|
[C1210] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs of STORE1
1 5(6(7
2 (173

3 (1:,1

4 /2$'

5 /2$'

11-48 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
[C1211] 1000 FIXEDPHI-0 → Selection list 4 Configuration inputs of STORE1
1 ,1
2 0$6.,

[C1212]
C1215
0$6.9

&   g
1000

g
FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration input of STORE1
Display of C1210
C1216
C1217
[C1220]
&  

& g
1000
-32767
-2147483647 {1}
FIXED0
{1}
2147483647
32767

→ Selection list 2
Display of C1211
Display of C1212
Digital inputs of STORE2
1

g
5(6(7
2 (173

C1223 &   Display of C1220


[C1230] 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2 Digital inputs of PHDIFF1
1 (1
2 5(6(7

[C1231] ,1 1000 FIXEDPHI-0 → Selection list 4 Configuration input of PHDIFF1


[C1232] 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration inputs of PHDIFF1
1

g
6(7
2 $''

C1235
C1236
C1237
&

&

&
g
g -32767
-2147483647
{1}
{1}
32767
2147483647
Display of C1230
Display of C1231
Display of C1232
[C1240] 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1
1 180
2 '(1

[C1241] $&7 1000 FIXED0 → Selection list 2


[C1242]
C1245
1
,1

g
1000 FIXED0INC
-199.99 {0.01 %}
→ Selection list 3
199.99

g
180
2 '(1

C1246
C1247
[C1250]
&

&

,1
g
1000
-2147483647
FIXEDPHI-0
{1} 2147483647
→ Selection list 4
Display of C1241
Display of C1242

[C1251] 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3


1

g
180
2 '(1

C1253
C1254
&

& g -32767
-2147483647
{1 rpm }
{1}
32767
2147483647
Display of C1250
Display of C1251
C1255
C1258
C1260
1 75,0

&

2GGRFS
g
1000

0
-32767
-16383
{1 rpm}
{1}
→ Selection list 4
32767
16383
DFSET-N-TRIM2
Display of C1255
Offset
C1261 18N 1 -32767 {1} 32767 numerator
C1262 'F1ON 1 1 {1} 32767 denominator
[C1265] 72548( 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration correction input
[C1266]
C1268
C1269
3IJ ,1

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0INC
-199.99
-2147483647
{0.01 %}
{1}
→ Selection list 3
199.99
2147483647
Configuration input
Display of C1265
Display of C1266
[C1270] 1000 FIXED0INC → Selection list 3 Configuration inputs of PHCMP3
1

g
,1
2 ,1

C1271 & -2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Display of C1270


C1272 )81LSJO1 3+&03 2 1 {1} 2 1 IN1 < IN2
2 IN1| < IN2

C1290 021,7 3 3 0/2/3 Monitoring of the synchronisation test


0 Trip
2 Warning

C1500
C1501
28SP8S RJH1DM

&O'F
g
141
-2147483648
2
{1}
{1}
2147483647
2000
3 Off
Output signal of FEVAN2
Target code of FEVAN2
C1502 68%EO'F 0 0 {1} 255 Target subcode FEVAN2

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-49


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Code LCD Possible settings Important


Lenze Choice
C1503 18NF5DSO5 1 0 {1} 100000 Numerator of FEVAN2
C1504 'F1ONJDSO5 0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN2 denominator
C1505 2GGRFS 0 0 {1} 1000000000 Offset von FEVAN2
[C1506] ,1 1000 FIXED0% → Selection list 1 Configuration analog input of FEVAN2
[C1507]
C1508
C1509
/2$'

&

&
g
1000

g
FIXED0
-32768 {1}
→ Selection list 2
32767
Digital inputs of FEVAN2
Display of C1506
Display of C1507
C1799
C1810
C1811
')287 G
NDV
6: ,' LFWPD'

6: 'DSF LFWPD'


L+X

g
1250

g
20 {1} 1250

11-50 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.4 Selection lists of signal links


Selection list 1, analog output signals (H)
000050 AIN1-OUT 010000 BRK-M-SET 020101 CAN-IN1.W1
000055 AIN2-OUT 015028 UTILIZATION 020102 CAN-IN1.W2
000100 DFSET-NOUT 019500 FCODE-17 020103 CAN-IN1.W3
001000 FIXED0% 019502 FCODE-26/1 020201 CAN-IN2.W1
001006 FIXED100% 019503 FCODE-26/2 020202 CAN-IN2.W2
001007 FIXED-100% 019504 FCODE-27/1 020203 CAN-IN2.W3
005000 MCTRL-NSET2 019505 FCODE-27/2 020204 CAN-IN2.W4
005001 MCTRL-NACT 019506 FCODE-32 020301 CAN-IN3.W1
005002 MCTRL-MSET2 019507 FCODE-37 020302 CAN-IN3.W2
005003 MCTRL-MACT 019510 FCODE-108/1 020303 CAN-IN3.W3
005004 MCTRL-IACT 019511 FCODE-108/2 020304 CAN-IN3.W4
005005 MCTRL-DCVOLT 019512 FCODE-109/1 025101 AIF-IN.W1
005009 MCTRL-PHI-ACT 019513 FCODE-109/2 025102 AIF-IN.W2
005050 NSET-NOUT 019515 FCODE-141 025103 AIF-IN.W3
005051 NSET-RFG-I 019521 FCODE-472/1
005100 MPOT1-OUT 019522 FCODE-472/2
005150 PCTRL1-OUT 019523 FCODE-472/3
005200 REF-N-SET 019524 FCODE-472/4
005500 ARIT1-OUT 019525 FCODE-472/5
005505 ARIT2-OUT 019526 FCODE-472/6
005550 ADD1-OUT 019527 FCODE-472/7
005600 RFG1-OUT 019528 FCODE-472/8
005610 SRFG1-OUT 019529 FCODE-472/9
005611 SRFG1-DIFF 019530 FCODE-472/10
005650 ASW1-OUT 019531 FCODE-472/11
005655 ASW2-OUT 019532 FCODE-472/12
005660 ASW3-OUT 019533 FCODE-472/13
005665 ASW4-OUT 019534 FCODE-472/14
005700 ANEG1-OUT 019535 FCODE-472/15
005705 ANEG2-OUT 019536 FCODE-472/16
005750 FIXSET1-OUT 019537 FCODE-472/17
005800 LIM1-OUT 019538 FCODE-472/18
005850 ABS1-OUT 019539 FCODE-472/19
005900 PT1-1-OUT 019540 FCODE-472/20
005950 DT1-1-OUT 019551 FCODE-473/1
006100 MFAIL-NOUT 019552 FCODE-473/2
006150 DB1-OUT 019553 FCODE-473/3
006200 CONV1-OUT 019554 FCODE-473/4
006205 CONV2-OUT 019555 FCODE-473/5
006210 CONV3-OUT 019556 FCODE-473/6
006215 CONV4-OUT 019557 FCODE-473/7
006230 CONVPHA1-OUT 019558 FCODE-473/8
006300 S&H1-OUT 019559 FCODE-473/9
006350 CURVE1-OUT 019560 FCODE-473/10
006400 FCNT1-OUT
006600 SYNC1-OUT3

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-51


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Selection list 2, digital output signals (G)


000051 DIGIN1 010000 BRK1-OUT 015000 DCTRL-TRIP 019500 FCODE-250
000052 DIGIN2 010001 BRK1-CINH 015001 DCTRL-MESS 019521 FCODE-471.B0
000053 DIGIN3 010002 BRK1-QSP 015002 DCTRL-WARN 019522 FCODE-471.B1
000054 DIGIN4 010003 BRK1-M-STORE 015003 DCTRL-FAIL 019523 FCODE-471.B2
000055 DIGIN5 010250 R/L/Q-QSP 015010 MONIT-LU 019524 FCODE-471.B3
000060 STATE-BUS-O 010251 R/L/Q-R/L 015011 MONIT-OU 019525 FCODE-471.B4
000065 DIGIN-CINH 010500 AND1-OUT 015012 MONIT-EEr 019526 FCODE-471.B5
000100 DFSET-ACK 010505 AND2-OUT 015013 MONIT-OC1 019527 FCODE-471.B6
000500 DCTRL-RDY 010510 AND3-OUT 015014 MONIT-OC2 019528 FCODE-471.B7
000501 DCTRL-CINH 010515 AND4-OUT 015015 MONIT-LP1 019529 FCODE-471.B8
000502 DCTRL-INIT 010520 AND5-OUT 015016 MONIT-OH 019530 FCODE-471.B9
000503 DCTRL-IMP 010525 AND6-OUT 015017 MONIT-OH3 019531 FCODE-471.B10
000504 DCTRL-NACT=0 010530 AND7-OUT 015018 MONIT-OH4 019532 FCODE-471.B11
000505 DCTRL-CW/CCW 010550 OR1-OUT 015019 MONIT-OH7 019533 FCODE-471.B12
001000 FIXED0 010555 OR2-OUT 015020 MONIT-OH8 019534 FCODE-471.B13
001001 FIXED1 010560 OR3-OUT 015021 MONIT-Sd2 019535 FCODE-471.B14
002000 DCTRL-PAR*1-O 010565 OR4-OUT 015022 MONIT-Sd3 019536 FCODE-471.B15
002001 DCTRL-PAR*2-O 010570 OR5-OUT 015023 MONIT-P03 019537 FCODE-471.B16
002002 DCTRL-PARBUSY 010600 NOT1-OUT 015024 MONIT-P13 019538 FCODE-471.B17
005001 MCTRL-QSP-OUT 010605 NOT2-OUT 015026 MONIT-CE0 019539 FCODE-471.B18
005002 MCTRL-IMAX 010610 NOT3-OUT 015027 MONIT-NMAX 019540 FCODE-471.B19
005003 MCTRL-MMAX 010615 NOT4-OUT 015028 MONIT-OC5 019541 FCODE-471.B20
005050 NSET-RFG-I=0 010620 NOT5-OUT 015029 MONIT-SD5 019542 FCODE-471.B21
005200 REF-OK 010650 CMP1-OUT 015030 MONIT-SD6 019543 FCODE-471.B22
005201 REF-BUSY 010655 CMP2-OUT 015031 MONIT-SD7 019544 FCODE-471.B23
006000 DFRFG1-FAIL 010660 CMP3-OUT 015032 MONIT-H07 019545 FCODE-471.B24
006001 DFRFG1-SYNC 010680 PHCMP1-OUT 015033 MONIT-H10 019546 FCODE-471.B25
006100 MFAIL-STATUS 010685 PHCMP2-OUT 015034 MONIT-H11 019547 FCODE-471.B26
006101 MFAIL-I-RESET 010690 PHCMP3-OUT 015040 MONIT-CE1 019548 FCODE-471.B27
006400 FCNT1-EQUAL 010700 DIGDEL1-OUT 015041 MONIT-CE2 019549 FCODE-471.B28
006600 SYNC1-STAT 010705 DIGDEL2-OUT 015042 MONIT-CE3 019550 FCODE-471.B29
010750 TRANS1-OUT 015043 MONIT-CE4 019551 FCODE-471.B30
010755 TRANS2-OUT 019552 FCODE-471.B31
010760 TRANS3-OUT 019751 FCODE-135.B0
010765 TRANS4-OUT 019752 FCODE-135.B1
010900 FLIP1-OUT 019753 FCODE-135.B2
010905 FLIP2-OUT 019755 FCODE-135.B4
012000 PHINT1-FAIL 019756 FCODE-135.B5
012005 PHINT2-FAIL 019757 FCODE-135.B6
012010 PHINT3-STAT 019758 FCODE-135.B7
013000 FEVAN1-BUSY 019763 FCODE-135.B12
013001 FEVAN1-FAIL 019764 FCODE-135.B13
013005 FEVAN2-BUSY 019765 FCODE-135.B14
013006 FEVAN2-FAIL 019766 FCODE-135.B15
014050 STORE1-TP-INH
014055 STORE2-TP-INH

11-52 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Selection list 2, digital output signals (G), continued


020001 CAN-CTRL.B0 020201 CAN-IN2.B0 020301 CAN-IN3.B0 025001 AIF-CTRL.B0
020002 CAN-CTRL.B1 020202 CAN-IN2.B1 020302 CAN-IN3.B1 025002 AIF-CTRL.B1
020003 CAN-CTRL.B2 020203 CAN-IN2.B2 020303 CAN-IN3.B2 025003 AIF-CTRL.B2
020005 CAN-CTRL.B4 020204 CAN-IN2.B3 020304 CAN-IN3.B3 025005 AIF-CTRL.B4
020006 CAN-CTRL.B5 020205 CAN-IN2.B4 020305 CAN-IN3.B4 025006 AIF-CTRL.B5
020007 CAN-CTRL.B6 020206 CAN-IN2.B5 020306 CAN-IN3.B5 025007 AIF-CTRL.B6
020008 CAN-CTRL.B7 020207 CAN-IN2.B6 020307 CAN-IN3.B6 025008 AIF-CTRL.B7
020013 CAN-CTRL.B12 020208 CAN-IN2.B7 020308 CAN-IN3.B7 025013 AIF-CTRL.B12
020014 CAN-CTRL.B13 020209 CAN-IN2.B8 020309 CAN-IN3.B8 025014 AIF-CTRL.B13
020015 CAN-CTRL.B14 020210 CAN-IN2.B9 020310 CAN-IN3.B9 025015 AIF-CTRL.B14
020016 CAN-CTRL.B15 020211 CAN-IN2.B10 020311 CAN-IN3.B10 025016 AIF-CTRL.B15
020101 CAN-IN1.B0 020212 CAN.IN2.B11 020312 CAN-IN3.B11 025101 AIF-IN.B0
020102 CAN-IN1.B1 020213 CAN-IN2.B12 020313 CAN-IN3.B12 025102 AIF-IN.B1
020103 CAN-IN1.B2 020214 CAN-IN2.B13 020314 CAN-IN3.B13 025103 AIF-IN.B2
020104 CAN-IN1.B3 020215 CAN-IN2.B14 020315 CAN-IN3.B14 025104 AIF-IN.B3
020105 CAN-IN1.B4 020216 CAN-IN2.B15 020316 CAN-IN3.B15 025105 AIF-IN.B4
020106 CAN-IN1.B5 020217 CAN-IN2.B16 020317 CAN-IN3.B16 025106 AIF-IN.B5
020107 CAN-IN1.B6 020218 CAN-IN2.B17 020318 CAN-IN3.B17 025107 AIF-IN.B6
020108 CAN-IN1.B7 020219 CAN-IN2.B18 020319 CAN-IN3.B18 025108 AIF-IN.B7
020109 CAN-IN1.B8 020220 CAN-IN2.B19 020320 CAN-IN3.B19 025109 AIF-IN.B8
020110 CAN-IN1.B9 020221 CAN-IN2.B20 020321 CAN-IN3.B20 025110 AIF-IN.B9
020111 CAN-IN1.B10 020222 CAN-IN2.B21 020322 CAN-IN3.B21 025111 AIF-IN.B10
020112 CAN-IN1.B11 020223 CAN-IN2.B22 020323 CAN-IN3.B22 025112 AIF-IN.B11
020113 CAN-IN1.B12 020224 CAN-IN2.B23 020324 CAN-IN3.B23 025113 AIF-IN.B12
020114 CAN-IN1.B13 020225 CAN-IN2.B24 020325 CAN-IN3.B24 025114 AIF-IN.B13
020115 CAN-IN1.B14 020226 CAN-IN2.B25 020326 CAN-IN3.B25 025115 AIF-IN.B14
020116 CAN-IN1.B15 020227 CAN-IN2.B26 020327 CAN-IN3.B26 025116 AIF-IN.B15
020117 CAN-IN1.B16 020228 CAN-IN2.B27 020328 CAN-IN3.B27 025117 AIF-IN.B16
020118 CAN-IN1.B17 020229 CAN-IN2.B28 020329 CAN-IN3.B28 025118 AIF-IN.B17
020119 CAN-IN1.B18 020230 CAN-IN2.B29 020330 CAN-IN3.B29 025119 AIF-IN.B18
020120 CAN-IN1.B19 020231 CAN-IN2.B30 020331 CAN-IN3.B30 025120 AIF-IN.B19
020121 CAN-IN1.B20 020232 CAN-IN2.B31 020332 CAN-IN3.B31 025121 AIF-IN.B20
020122 CAN-IN1.B21 025122 AIF-IN.B21
020123 CAN-IN1.B22 025123 AIF-IN.B22
020124 CAN-IN1.B23 025124 AIF-IN.B23
020125 CAN-IN1.B24 025125 AIF-IN.B24
020126 CAN-IN1.B25 025126 AIF-IN.B25
020127 CAN-IN1.B26 025127 AIF-IN.B26
020128 CAN-IN1.B27 025128 AIF-IN.B27
020129 CAN-IN1.B28 025129 AIF-IN.B28
020130 CAN-IN1.B29 025130 AIF-IN.B29
020131 CAN-IN1.B30 025131 AIF-IN.B30
020132 CAN-IN1.B31 025132 AIF-IN.B31

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-53


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Selection list 3, Selection list 4, Selection list 5,


Phase signals (G) Phase difference signals (F) Function blocks
000100 DFSET-PSET 000050 DFIN-OUT 000000 empty 010000 BRK1
000101 DFSET-PSET2 000100 DFSET-POUT 000050 AIN1 010250 R/L/Q
001000 FIXED0INC 000250 DFOUT-OUT 000055 AIN2 010500 AND1
005000 MCTRL-PHI-ANG 001000 FIXEDPHI-0 000070 AOUT1 010505 AND2
005200 REF-PSET 005000 MCTRL-PHI-ACT 000075 AOUT2 010510 AND3
005520 ARITPH1-OUT 006000 DFRFG-OUT 000100 DFSET 010515 AND4
005580 PHADD1-OUT 006220 CONV5-OUT 000200 DFIN 010520 AND5
005581 PHADD1-OUT2 006225 CONV6-OUT 000250 DFOUT 010525 AND6
006235 CONVPHPH1-OUT 006230 CONVPHA1-OUT2 005050 NSET 010530 AND7
006600 SYNC1-OUT2 006240 CONVPP1-OUT 005100 MPOT1 010550 OR1
012000 PHINT1-OUT 006600 SYNC1-OUT1 005150 PCTRL1 010555 OR2
012005 PHINT2-OUT 019521 FCODE-475/1 005200 REF 010560 OR3
012010 PHINT3-OUT 019522 FCODE-475/2 005500 ARIT1 010565 OR4
012050 PHDIV1-OUT 005505 ARIT2 010570 OR5
014000 PHDIFF1-OUT 005520 ARITPH1 010600 NOT1
014050 STORE1-PHACT 005550 ADD1 010605 NOT2
014051 STORE1-PH1 005580 PHADD1 010610 NOT3
014052 STORE1-PH2 005600 RFG1 010615 NOT4
014053 STORE1-PHDIFF 005610 SRFG1 010620 NOT5
014055 STORE2-PHACT 005650 ASW1 010650 CMP1
014056 STORE2-PH1 005655 ASW2 010655 CMP2
014057 STORE1-PH2 005660 ASW3 010660 CMP3
014100 GEARCOMP-OUT 005665 ASW4 010680 PHCMP1
019521 FCODE-474/1 005700 ANEG1 010685 PHCMP2
019522 FCODE-474/2 005705 ANEG2 010690 PHCMP3
019523 FCODE-474/3 005750 FIXSET1 010700 DIGDEL1
019524 FCODE-474/4 005800 LIM1 010705 DIGDEL2
019525 FCODE-474/5 005850 ABS1 010750 TRANS1
020103 CAN-IN1.D1 005900 PT1-1 010755 TRANS2
020201 CAN-IN2.D1 005950 DT1-1 010760 TRANS3
020301 CAN-IN3.D1 006000 DFRFG1 010765 TRANS4
025103 AIF-IN.D1 006100 MFAIL 010900 FLIP1
006150 DB1 010905 FLIP2
006200 CONV1 012000 PHINT1
006205 CONV2 012005 PHINT2
006210 CONV3 012010 PHINT3
006215 CONV4 012050 PHDIV1
006220 CONV5 013000 FEVAN1
006225 CONV6 013005 FEVAN2
006230 CONVPHA1 013100 TR
006235 CONVPHPH1 014000 PHDIFF1
006240 CONVPP1 014050 STORE1
006300 S&H1 014055 STORE2
006350 CURVE1 014100 GEARCOMP
006420 FCNT1 015100 MLP1
006600 SYNC1 020000 CAN-OUT
025000 AIF-OUT

11-54 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Selection list 10, error list


000000 No fail 000105 H05 trip
000011 OC1 trip 000107 H07 trip
000012 OC2 trip 000110 H10 trip
000015 OC5 trip 000111 H11 trip
000022 LUQ trip 000153 P03 trip
000032 LP1 trip 000163 P13 trip
000050 OH trip 000166 P16 trip
000053 OH3 trip 000200 NMAX trip
000057 OH7 trip 001020 OU message
000058 OH8 trip 001030 LU message
000061 CE0 trip 001091 EEr message
000062 CE1 trip 002032 LP1 warning
000063 CE2 trip 002054 OH4 warning
000064 CE3 trip 002057 OH7 warning
000065 CE4 trip 002058 OH8 warning
000070 U15 trip 002061 CE0 warning
000071 CCr trip 002062 CE1 warning
000072 Pr1 trip 002063 CE2 warning
000073 Pr2 trip 002064 CE3 warning
000074 PEr trip 002065 CE4 warning
000075 Pr0 trip 002082 Sd2 warning
000077 Pr3 trip 002083 Sd3 warning
000078 Pr4 trip 002085 Sd5 warning
000079 PI trip 002086 Sd6 warning
000082 Sd2 trip 002091 EER warning
000083 Sd3 trip 002153 P03 warning
000085 Sd5 trip 002163 P13 warning
000086 Sd6 trip 002166 P16 warning
000087 Sd7 trip
000091 EEr trip

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-55


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.5 Motor selection list

11.5.1 Servo motors

Tip!
For the parameter setting of the drive the available motor type is to be entered under code C0086.
This value is indicated on the nameplate.
Example: “161”. The motor designation behind this number is shown in the display
”DSKS56-33-200”.

If the code value is > 269:


See Reference List for servo
motors

9300std201

C0086 Lenze motor type C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Thermal sensor
Value Name PN [kW] nN [rpm] IN [A] fN [Hz] aN [V]
10 MDSKA56-140 MDSKAXX056-22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
11 MDFKA71-120 MDFKAXX071-22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
12 MDSKA71-140 MDSKAXX071-22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
13 MDFKA80-60 MDFKAXX080-22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
14 MDSKA80-70 MDSKAXX080-22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
15 MDFKA80-120 MDFKAXX080-22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
16 MDSKA80-140 MDSKAXX080-22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
17 MDFKA90-60 MDFKAXX090-22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
18 MDSKA90-80 MDSKAXX090-22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
19 MDFKA90-120 MDFKAXX090-22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
20 MDSKA90-140 MDSKAXX090-22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
21 MDFKA100-60 MDFKAXX100-22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
22 MDSKA100-80 MDSKAXX100-22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
23 MDFKA100-120 MDFKAXX100-22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
Asynchronouss servo
Asynchrono
24 MDSKA100-140 MDSKAXX100-22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330 KTY
motor
25 MDFKA112-60 MDFKAXX112-22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
26 MDSKA112-85 MDSKAXX112-22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
27 MDFKA112-120 MDFKAXX112-22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
28 MDSKA112-140 MDSKAXX112-22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
30 DFQA100-50 MDFQAXX100-22 10.60 1420 26.5 50
31 DFQA100-100 MDFQAXX100-22 20.30 2930 46.9 100
32 DFQA112-28 MDFQAXX112-22 11.50 760 27.2 28
33 DFQA112-58 MDFQAXX112-22 22.70 1670 49.1 58
34 DFQA132-20 MDFQAXX132-32 17.00 550 45.2 20 360
35 DFQA132-42 MDFQAXX132-32 40.30 1200 88.8 42
40 DFQA112-50 MDFQAXX112-22 20.10 1425 43.7 50
41 DFQA112-100 MDFQAXX112-22 38.40 2935 81.9 100
42 DFQA132-36 MDFQAXX132-32 36.40 1030 77.4 39
43 DFQA132-76 MDFQAXX132-32 60.10 2235 144.8 76 340

11-56 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

C0086 Lenze motor type C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Thermal sensor
Value Name PN [kW] nN [rpm] IN [A] fN [Hz] aN [V]
50 DSVA56-140 DSVAXX056-22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
51 DFVA71-120 DFVAXX071-22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
52 DSVA71-140 DSVAXX071-22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
53 DFVA80-60 DFVAXX080-22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
54 DSVA80-70 DSVAXX080-22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
55 DFVA80-120 DFVAXX080-22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
56 DSVA80-140 DSVAXX080-22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
57 DFVA90-60 DFVAXX090-22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
58 DSVA90-80 DSVAXX090-22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
Asynchronouss servo
Asynchrono TKO
59 DFVA90-120 DFVAXX090-22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
motor (Thermostat)
60 DSVA90-140 DSVAXX090-22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
61 DFVA100-60 DFVAXX100-22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
62 DSVA100-80 DSVAXX100-22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
63 DFVA100-120 DFVAXX100-22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
64 DSVA100-140 DSVAXX100-22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330
65 DFVA112-60 DFVAXX112-22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
66 DSVA112-85 DSVAXX112-22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
67 DFVA112-120 DFVAXX112-22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
68 DSVA112-140 DSVAXX112-22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
108 DSKS36-13-200 MDSKSXX036-13 0.25 4000 0.9 200 245
109 DSKS36-23-200 MDSKSXX036-23 0.54 4000 1.1 200 345
110 MDSKS56-23-150 MDSKSXX056-23 0.60 3000 1.25 150 350
111 MDSKS56-33-150 MDSKSXX056-33 0.91 3000 2.0 150 340
112 MDSKS71-13-150 MDSKSXX071-13 1.57 3000 3.1 150 360
113 MDFKS71-13-150 MDFKSXX071-13 2.29 3000 4.35 150 385
114 MDSKS71-23-150 MDSKSXX071-23 2.33 3000 4.85 150 360
115 MDFKS71-23-150 MDFKSXX071-23 3.14 3000 6.25 150 375
116 MDSKS71-33-150 MDSKSXX071-33 3.11 3000 6.7 150 330 Synchronous servo
KTY
117 MDFKS71-33-150 MDFKSXX071-33 4.24 3000 9.1 150 345 motor
160 DSKS56-23-190 MDSKSXX056-23 1.1 3800 2.3 190 330
161 DSKS56-33-200 MDSKSXX056-33 1.8 4000 3.6 200 325
162 DSKS71-03-170 MDSKSXX071-03 2.0 3400 4.2 170 330
163 DFKS71-03-165 MDFKSXX071-03 2.6 3300 5.6 165 330
164 DSKS71-13-185 MDSKSXX071-13 3.2 3700 7.0 185 325
165 DFKS71-13-180 MDFKSXX071-13 4.1 3600 9.2 180 325
166 DSKS71-33-180 MDSKSXX071-33 4.6 3600 10.0 180 325
167 DFKS71-33-175 MDFKSXX071-33 5.9 3500 13.1 175 325

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-57


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Reference List for servo motors

Tip!
The motors listed under “Nameplate data” are available with GDC and unit software.
1. Please enter the value stated for your motor under C0086 in GDC or the keypad.
2. Then check all codes listed in the table.
Overwrite the entry in GDC or the keypad with the values indicated in the table.
3. If necessary, codes C0070 and C0071 must be adapted to your machine.

Data entry
Nameplate
C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
Field: Field: C0086 Imax Pr Rs Lσ nr
Ir [A] fr [Hz] ar [V] cos ϕ Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
C86 Motor type [A] [kW] [ Ω] [mH] [rpm]
1000 MDSKA-71-22 54 3.75 0.88 8.4 34.98 1950 2.50 70 390 0.82 2 100 1.5 1.5
1001 MDFQA-112-12 33 42.60 12.90 0.45 4.3 1660 28.40 58 360 0.85 20 21 2 1
1002 MDFQA-112-12 41 70.50 21.80 0.45 4.3 2930 47.00 100 360 0.83 14 21 1.3 1
1003 MDSKA-56-22 50 6.75 1.57 2.25 6.5 6000 4.50 202 280 0.72 3 50 1.3 1.5
1004 MDSKS071-33-39 112 5.10 0.95 7.2 34.5 780 3.40 39 325 1.00 3 20 2.5 1.5
1005 MDSKS071-33-41 112 2.25 0.45 16.3 68 820 1.50 41 330 1.00 2 20 2.5 1.5
1076 MDSKS071-33-90 112 5.85 1.60 3.67 17.7 1800 3.90 90 310 1.00 10 20 0.7 1.7
1077 MDSKA-71-22 51 2.18 0.33 35.7 131.8 725 1.45 30 360 0.78 10 70 1.5 2
1103 SDSGA056-22 50 1.20 0.24 29.3 123 2790 0.80 100 390 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1104 SDSGA056-22 40 2.55 0.24 29.3 123 2790 1.70 100 230 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1105 SDSGA063-22 50 1.80 0.40 29.3 123 2800 1.20 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1106 SDSGA063-22 40 3.15 0.40 29.3 123 2800 2.10 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1107 SDSGA063-32 50 2.55 0.60 29.3 123 2800 1.70 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1108 SDSGA063-32 40 4.50 0.6 29.3 123 2800 3 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1109 MDSKS056-23-280 114 8.00 1.10 6.72 8.34 5600 2.30 280 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1110 MDSKS056-23-310 114 9.00 1.10 5.42 6.78 6200 2.30 310 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1111 MDSKS056-33-300 114 10.00 1.75 3.31 4.62 6000 3.60 300 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1112 MDSKS056-33-265 114 8.00 1.72 4.1 5.73 5300 3.60 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1113 MDSKS071-13-265 114 23.00 3.20 0.54 2.56 5300 7.00 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1116 MDSKS071-33-270 114 25.00 5.70 0.38 1.91 5400 12.50 270 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5

11-58 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.5.2 Three-phase asynchronous motors

Tip!
If the code is > 269:
See Reference List for motor types
MDXMA

Types DXRAXX
GDC / Display Nameplate C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Thermal sensor
Valu
Name Pr [kW] nr [rpm] Ir [A] fr [Hz] ar [V]
e
210 DXRAXX071-12-50 DXRAXX071-12 0.25 1410 0.9
211 DXRAXX071-22-50 DXRAXX071-22 0.37 1398 1.2
212 DXRAXX080-12-50 DXRAXX080-12 0.55 1400 1.7
213 DXRAXX080-22-50 DXRAXX080-22 0.75 1410 2.3
214 DXRAXX090-12-50 DXRAXX090-12 1.10 1420 2.7
215 DXRAXX090-32-50 DXRAXX090-32 1.50 1415 3.6
216 DXRAXX100-22-50 DXRAXX100-22 2.20 1425 4.8
TKO
217 DXRAXX100-32-50 DXRAXX100-32 3.00 1415 6.6
(Thermostat)
218 DXRAXX112-12-50 DXRAXX112-12 4.00 1435 8.3
219 DXRAXX132-12-50 DXRAXX132-12 5.50 1450 11.0 Asynchronous
A h inverter
i t
50 400 motor
220 DXRAXX132-22-50 DXRAXX132-22 7.50 1450 14.6 (in star connection)
221 DXRAXX160-12-50 DXRAXX160-12 11.00 1460 21.0
222 DXRAXX160-22-50 DXRAXX160-22 15.00 1460 27.8
223 DXRAXX180-12-50 DXRAXX180-12 18.50 1470 32.8
224 DXRAXX180-22-50 DXRAXX180-22 22.00 1456 38.8
225 30kW-ASM-50 - 30.00 1470 52.0
226 37kW-ASM-50 - 37.00 1470 66.0
227 45kW-ASM-50 - 45.00 1480 82.0 _
228 55kW-ASM-50 - 55.00 1480 93.0
229 75kW-ASM-50 - 75.00 1480 132.0

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-59


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

GDC / Display Nameplate C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Thermal sensor
Valu
Name Pr [kW] nr [rpm] Ir [A] fr [Hz] ar [V]
e
250 DXRAXX071-12-87 DXRAXX071-12 0.43 2525 1.5
251 DXRAXX071-22-87 DXRAXX071-22 0.64 2515 2.0
252 DXRAXX080-12-87 DXRAXX080-12 0.95 2515 2.9
253 DXRAXX080-22-87 DXRAXX080-22 1.3 2525 4.0
254 DXRAXX090-12-87 DXRAXX090-12 2.0 2535 4.7
255 DXRAXX090-32-87 DXRAXX090-32 2.7 2530 6.2
256 DXRAXX100-22-87 DXRAXX100-22 3.9 2535 8.3
TKO
257 DXRAXX100-32-87 DXRAXX100-32 5.35 2530 11.4
(Thermostat)
258 DXRAXX112-12-87 DXRAXX112-12 7.10 2545 14.3
259 DXRAXX132-12-87 DXRAXX132-12 9.7 2555 19.1 Asynchronous
A h inverter
i t
87 400 motor
260 DXRAXX132-22-87 DXRAXX132-22 13.2 2555 25.4 (in delta connection)
261 DXRAXX160-12-87 DXRAXX160-12 19.3 2565 36.5
262 DXRAXX160-22-87 DXRAXX160-22 26.4 2565 48.4
263 DXRAXX180-12-87 DXRAXX180-12 32.4 2575 57.8
264 DXRAXX180-22-87 DXRAXX180-22 38.7 2560 67.4
265 30kW-ASM-50 - 52.00 2546 90.0
266 37kW-ASM-50 - 64.00 2546 114.0
267 45kW-ASM-50 - 78.00 2563 142.0 _
268 55kW-ASM-50 - 95.00 2563 161.0
269 75kW-ASM-50 - 130.00 2563 228.0

Reference List for motor types MDXMA

Tip!
The motors listed under “Nameplate data” are available with GDC and unit software.
1. Please enter the value stated for your motor under C0086 in GDC or the keypad.
2. Then check all codes listed in the table.
Overwrite the entry in GDC or the keypad with the values indicated in the table.
3. If necessary, codes C0070 and C0071 must be adapted to your machine.

Data entry
Nameplate
C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
Field: Field: C0086 Imax PN Rs Lσ nN
IN [A] fN [Hz] aN [V] cos ϕ Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
C86 Motor type [A] [kW] [ Ω] [mH] [rpm]
410 MDXMAXM-071-12 210 1.23 0.25 35.80 116.80 1400 0.82 50 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
411 MDXMAXM-071-32 211 1.80 0.37 27.00 112.70 1400 1.20 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
412 MDXMAXM-080-12 212 2.40 0.55 16.30 78.60 1400 1.60 50 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
413 MDXMAXM-080-32 213 3.00 0.75 11.20 59.30 1380 2.00 50 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
414 MDXMAXM-090-12 214 3.90 1.10 9.14 41.80 1410 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
415 MDXMAXM-090-32 215 5.25 1.50 5.10 27.70 1420 3.50 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
416 MDXMAXM-100-12 216 8.40 2.20 2.96 18.20 1400 5.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
417 MDXMAXM-100-32 217 10.95 3.00 2.20 13.40 1400 7.30 50 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
418 MDXMAXM-112-22 218 12.75 4.00 1.50 10.80 1430 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
440 MDXMAXM-071-12 250 2.10 0.43 35.8 116.80 2510 1.40 87 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
441 MDXMAXM-071-32 251 3.15 0.64 27.0 112.70 2510 2.10 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
442 MDXMAXM-080-12 252 4.20 0.95 16.3 78.60 2510 2.80 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
443 MDXMAXM-080-32 253 5.25 1.30 11.2 59.30 2490 3.50 87 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
444 MDXMAXM-090-12 254 6.75 2.00 9.14 41.80 2520 4.50 87 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10

11-60 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Data entry
Nameplate
C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
Field: Field: C0086 Imax PN Rs Lσ nN
IN [A] fN [Hz] aN [V] cos ϕ Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
C86 Motor type [A] [kW] [ Ω] [mH] [rpm]
445 MDXMAXM-090-32 255 9.15 2.70 5.1 27.70 2530 6.10 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
446 MDXMAXM-100-12 256 14.55 3.90 2.96 18.20 2510 9.70 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
447 MDXMAXM-100-32 257 19.05 5.40 2.2 13.40 2510 12.70 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
448 MDXMAXM-112-22 258 22.20 7.10 1.5 10.80 2540 14.80 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
449 MDXMAXM-112-32 259 18.75 5.50 2.45 21.40 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
450 MDXMAXM-132-22 259 25.20 7.50 1.42 15.00 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
451 MDXMAXM-132-32 259 29.25 9.20 1.34 14.00 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1006 MDXMAxx-071-12 210 1.28 0.25 39.90 157.20 1355 0.85 50 400 0.70 6 300 3.6 2
1007 MDXMAxx-071-12 250 2.25 0.47 39.90 157.20 2475 1.50 87 400 0.66 6 300 2 2
1008 MDXMAxx-071-32 211 1.73 0.37 25.03 122.60 1345 1.15 50 400 0.74 6 300 3.4 2
1009 MDXMAxx-071-32 251 3.00 0.67 25.03 122.60 2470 2.00 87 400 0.70 6 300 2.5 2
1010 MDXMAxx-080-12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1370 1.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 3.2 2
1011 MDXMAxx-080-12 252 3.90 1.00 20.69 89.00 2480 2.60 87 400 0.73 6 300 1.6 2
1012 MDXMAxx-080-32 213 2.85 0.75 11.69 65.20 1390 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 3.5 2
1013 MDXMAxx-080-32 253 4.95 1.35 11.69 65.20 2510 3.30 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.9 3
1014 MDXMAxx-090-12 214 3.90 1.10 10.01 40.20 1405 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 2.5 2
1015 MDXMAxx-090-12 254 6.75 2.00 10.01 40.20 2520 4.50 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1016 MDXMAxx-090-32 215 5.25 1.50 5.85 28.80 1410 3.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 2 2
1017 MDXMAxx-090-32 255 9.15 2.70 5.85 28.80 2525 6.10 87 400 0.76 6 300 1 2
1018 MDXMAxx-100-12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1019 MDXMAxx-100-12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.76 6 300 0.8 1.5
1020 MDXMAxx-100-32 217 9.75 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.50 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1021 MDXMAxx-100-32 257 17.10 5.40 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.4 1.8
1022 MDXMAxx-112-22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1023 MDXMAxx-112-22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.83 6 300 1 2
1024 MDXMAxx-132-12 219 16.50 5.50 0.86 13.00 1450 11.00 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 2
1025 MDXMAxx-132-12 259 28.65 9.70 0.86 13.00 2555 19.10 87 400 0.83 6 300 1.3 2
1026 MDXMAxx-132-22 220 21.90 7.50 0.80 11.00 1450 14.60 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 2
1027 MDXMAxx-132-22 260 38.10 13.20 0.80 11.00 2555 25.40 87 400 0.84 6 300 0.95 1.8
1028 MDXMAxx-160-22 221 31.50 11.00 0.50 7.00 1460 21.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.9 2.2
1029 MDXMAxx-160-22 261 54.75 19.30 0.50 7.00 2565 36.50 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1030 MDXMAxx-160-32 222 41.70 15.00 0.40 5.50 1460 27.80 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.7 2.5
1031 MDXMAxx-160-32 262 72.60 26.40 0.40 5.50 2565 48.40 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 1.8
1032 MDXMAxx-180-12 223 49.20 18.50 0.40 4.00 1470 32.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1.4 1.7
1033 MDXMAxx-180-12 263 86.70 32.40 0.40 4.00 2575 57.80 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.7
1034 MDXMAxx-180-22 224 58.20 22.00 0.20 3.80 1456 38.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1 1.5
1035 MDXMAxx-180-22 264 101.1 38.70 0.20 3.80 2560 67.40 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.5
1036 MDXMAXM-63-12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1037 MDXMAXM-63-12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1038 MDXMAXM-63-32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1039 MDXMAXM-63-32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1040 MDXMAXM-112-32 219 18.75 5.50 0.86 7.20 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1041 MDXMAXM-112-32 259 32.55 9.60 0.86 7.20 2550 21.70 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1042 MDXMAXM-132-22 220 25.20 7.50 0.54 4.80 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1043 MDXMAXM-132-22 260 43.80 13.10 0.54 4.80 2570 29.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1044 MDXMAXM-132-32 221 29.25 9.20 0.46 4.70 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1045 MDXMAXM-132-32 261 50.70 16.00 0.46 4.70 2560 33.80 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1046 MDXMAXM-160-22 260 31.50 11.00 1.27 18.97 1466 21.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1047 MDXMAXM-160-32 260 42.30 15.00 0.87 14.28 1466 28.20 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1048 MDXMAXM-180-22 260 54.60 18.50 0.40 4.00 1440 36.40 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1049 MDXMAXM-180-32 260 66.15 22.00 0.20 3.80 1465 44.10 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1050 MDXMAXM-200-32 260 90.00 30.00 0.17 3.50 1455 60.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-61


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

Data entry
Nameplate
C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
Field: Field: C0086 Imax PN Rs Lσ nN
IN [A] fN [Hz] aN [V] cos ϕ Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
C86 Motor type [A] [kW] [ Ω] [mH] [rpm]
1051 MDXMAXM-225-12 260 108.0 37.00 0.15 2.00 1460 72.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1052 MDXMAXM-225-22 260 128.25 45.00 0.15 2.00 1475 85.50 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1053 MDXMAXM-063-11 210 1.43 0.18 51.00 273.7 2760 0.95 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1054 MDXMAXM-063-31 210 1.65 0.25 33.00 93.4 2760 1.10 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1055 MDXMAXM-071-11 211 1.50 0.37 22.50 90.2 2840 1.00 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1056 MDXMAXM-071-31 212 2.25 0.55 16.90 62.9 2840 1.50 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1057 MDXMAXM-080-11 213 2.85 0.75 11.36 47.4 2850 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1058 MDXMAXM-080-31 214 4.20 1.10 6.86 33.4 2810 2.80 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1059 MDXMAXM-090-11 215 4.80 1.50 5.10 22.2 2840 3.20 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1060 MDXMAXM-090-31 216 7.20 2.20 3.20 14.5 2840 4.80 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1061 MDXMAXM-100-31 217 9.30 3.00 1.81 10.7 2850 6.20 50 400 0.88 6 300 1.5 10
1062 MDXMAXM-100-41 218 12.75 4.00 1.45 8.6 2830 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1063 MDXMAXM-112-31 250 18.30 5.50 3.10 17 2890 12.20 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1064 MDXMAXM-112-41 250 23.25 7.50 1.96 12 2900 15.50 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1065 MDXMAXM-132-21 250 28.05 9.00 1.41 11.292 2925 18.70 50 400 0.89 6 300 1.5 10
1066 MDXMAXM-071-13 210 1.13 0.18 58.93 342 870 0.75 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1067 MDXMAXM-071-13 250 1.95 0.31 58.93 342 1610 1.30 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1068 MDXMAXM-071-33 210 1.50 0.25 37.90 116.8 920 1.00 50 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1069 MDXMAXM-071-33 250 2.55 0.43 37.90 116.8 1660 1.70 87 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1070 MDXMAXM-080-13 211 2.10 0.37 28.00 112.7 900 1.40 50 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1071 MDXMAXM-080-13 251 3.60 0.64 28.00 112.7 1640 2.40 87 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1072 MDXMAXM-080-33 212 2.85 0.55 16.60 78.6 900 1.90 50 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1073 MDXMAXM-080-33 252 4.95 0.95 16.60 78.6 1640 3.30 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1078 MDFMAxx-250-22 224 147.75 55.00 0.04 1.92 1475 98.50 50 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1079 MDFMAxx-250-22 264 255.90 95.00 0.04 1.92 2585 170.60 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1080 MDEBAXM-063-12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1081 MDEBAXM-063-12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1082 MDEBAXM-063-32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1083 MDEBAXM-063-32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1084 MDEBAXM-071-12 210 1.35 0.25 39.90 157.20 1390 0.90 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.6 2
1085 MDEBAXM-071-12 250 2.34 0.43 39.90 157.20 2500 1.56 87 400 0.64 6 300 2 2
1086 MDEBAXM-071-32 211 1.95 0.37 25.03 122.60 1380 1.30 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.4 2
1087 MDEBAXM-071-32 251 3.38 0.64 25.03 122.60 2490 2.25 87 400 0.64 6 300 2.5 2
1088 MDEBAXM-080-12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1400 1.60 50 400 0.68 6 300 3.2 2
1089 MDEBAXM-080-12 252 4.16 0.95 20.69 89.00 2510 2.77 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.6 2
1090 MDEBAXM-080-32 213 3.00 0.75 11.69 65.20 1400 2.00 50 400 0.72 6 300 3.5 2
1091 MDEBAXM-080-32 253 5.20 1.30 11.69 65.20 2510 3.46 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.9 3
1092 MDEBAXM-090-12 214 4.05 1.10 6.40 37.00 1420 2.70 50 400 0.77 6 300 2.5 2
1093 MDEBAXM-090-12 254 7.05 2.00 6.40 37.00 2535 4.70 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1094 MDEBAXM-090-32 215 5.40 1.50 4.80 26.00 1415 3.60 50 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1095 MDEBAXM-090-32 255 9.30 2.70 4.80 26.00 2530 6.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1 2
1096 MDEBAXM-100-12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1097 MDEBAXM-100-12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.80 6 300 0.8 1.5
1098 MDEBAXM-100-32 217 9.90 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.60 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1099 MDEBAXM-100-32 257 17.10 5.35 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.4 1.8
1100 MDEBAXM-112-22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1101 MDEBAXM-112-22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.82 6 300 1 2
1102 MDEBAXM-112-32 219 17.85 5.50 2.71 21.40 1425 11.90 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1114 MDFMAxx-200-32 224 83.25 30.00 1465 55.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1115 MDFMAxx-200-32 264 145.50 52.00 2575 97.00 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2

11-62 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.6 Glossary

Term Meaning
CE Communauté Européenne (English: European Community)
Code For entry and display (access) of parameter values.
Variable addressing according to the format ”code/subcode” (Cxxxx/xx).
All variables can be addressed via the code digits.
Contouring error Deviation between momentary position setpoint and actual position. Display for a momentary following error under C0908.
Contouring error monitoring Monitors the momentary following error if the contouring error tolerance is exceeded and releases a fault indication, if necessary.
Contouring error tolerance If the contouring error reaches a defined contouring error tolerance, a fault indication is released.
Ctrl. enable Controller enable
Ctrl. inhibit Controller inhibit ( = Controller enable )
Fieldbus For data exchange between superimposed control and positioning control, e.g. InterBus-S or PROFIBUS DP
GDC Global Drive Control (PC-program (Windows) for Lenze controllers)
INTERBUS Industrial communication standard to DIN E19258
LECOM Lenze Communication
LU Undervoltage
OU Overvoltage
PC Personal Computer
PM Permanent magnet
QSP Quick stop
RFG Ramp generator
Select target position The target which is to be approached by means of a defined traversing profile.

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-63


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11.7 Table of keywords

A C
Cable cross-sections, 3-6, 4-14
Acceleration time, 11-17, 11-26 Control cables, 4-20
Mains connection, 4-13
Motor connection, 4-17
Accessories, 11-1
Cable specification, 4-12
Accessory kit, 1-1 CAN bus identifier, 11-28
CANopen, 4-26
Actual motor current, 11-19
Code table, 11-15

Actual motor voltage, 11-19 Collective screen plate, 4-20


Commissioning, 5-1
Actual speed, 11-19 Configuration, 8-1
Function blocks, 8-4
Actual value display, 7-16 Global Drive Control, 8-3
Monitoring, 8-15
Additional setpoint, 11-19 Predefined configurations, 8-1
Connection
Aggressive gases, 4-1 Brake unit, 4-17
Connection diagram, 4-22
Appendix, 11-1 Control cables, 4-20
Mains, 4-13
Motor, 4-15
Application as directed, 1-2
Connection diagrams, 4-22
Application conditions, 3-2 Connections, Power, 4-13
Control cables, 4-20
Application examples, Speed control, 11-2, 11-5, 11-7,
Control connection, 4-20
11-10, 11-12
Control terminals, 4-20
Assembly, 4-1 Max. permissible cross-sections, for motor connection, 4-20
Overview, 4-20
with fixing rails or brackets, 4-2 Protection against inverse polarity, 4-20
Terminal assignment, 4-20
Automation interface, 4-27
Controller, 1-1
Application as directed, 1-2
Cold plate technology, 4-6
Labelling, 1-2
B Cooling air, 4-1
Current controller, Optimisation for rotor position adjustment,
5-6
Brake unit, 4-17
Current derating, 6-3
Bus connection, 4-26 Current operated protections, 4-9

11-64 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

D F
FAIL-QSP, 8-15
DC-bus voltage, 11-19 Fault elimination, 9-1
Fault message, Reset, 9-9
Deceleration time, 11-17, 11-26
Feedback signals, 4-30
Encoder connection, 4-32
Definitions, 1-1
Resolver connection, 4-31
Temperature monitoring, 4-28
Dimensions, 3-7
Field controller, 11-20
Standard units, 4-2
Free space, 4-1

Display, Actual values, 7-16 Function blocks, 8-4


Configuration code, 8-5
Connection, 8-6
Drive system, 1-1
Create connections, 8-8
Display code, 8-6
Input name, 8-5
Input symbol, 8-5
E Names, 8-5
Output name, 8-6
Output symbol, 8-6
Electrical data Parameterization code, 8-6
Remove connections, 8-9
200 % overcurrent, 3-4
Signal types, 8-4
Types 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Fuses, 3-6
Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5 Mains connection, 4-14

EMC
G
Assembly, 4-34
Global Drive Control, 8-3
CE-typical drive system, Installation, 4-34 Status indications, 6-1
Filters, 4-34 Global-Drive-Control, 11-1
Grounding, 4-34 Diagnostics, 9-1

Installation, 4-34
Glossary, 11-63

Shielding, 4-34
H
Encoder connection, 4-32 History buffer, 9-3
Assembly, 9-3
Error messages, 9-5 Working with the, 9-4

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-65


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

I M
Mains conditions, 4-12
Information on operation, 6-2
Mains connection, 4-13
Inputs
Protection, 4-14
Analog, 4-21
Mains filter, 3-7
Digital, 4-21
Mains types, 4-12
Installation
Maintenance, 10-1
CE-typical drive system, 4-34
Assembly, 4-34 Manufacturer, 1-2
Filters, 4-34
Grounding, 4-34 Maximum speed, 11-17
Shielding, 4-34
Cold plate, 4-6 Mechanical installation, 4-1
Electrical, 4-9 Message, 8-15
Mechanical, 4-1 Messages, Error, 9-5
Standard assembly, 4-2
Monitor output, 4-21
Insulation, 4-10 Monitoring, 8-15
FAIL-QSP, 8-15
Fault display via digital output, 8-18
J Message, 8-15
Monitoring functions, 8-17
JOG setpoint, 11-19 Reactions, 8-15
Set reactions, 8-16
Jumper, Analog setpoint selection, 4-21 Warning, 8-15

Motor, Selection list, 11-56

K Motor cable, Shielding, 4-15


Motor connection, 4-15, 4-16
Keypad, 7-7
Motor potentiometer, 11-27
Operating level, 7-9
Status messages, 9-1
Motor protection, 4-11
Motor stator resistance, 11-20
Operating level, 7-9

Operating unit N
Display, 7-7
Key functions, 7-8 Noise optimised operation, 11-18
User menu, 7-9 Notes on operation, 6-2

L O
Operating mode of the motor control, 11-17
Labelling, Controller, 1-2
Operation, 6-1
Leakage inductivity, 11-20 Oscillations, 4-1
LECOM, Status word C0150, 9-2 Outputs
Analog, 4-21
Legal regulations, 1-2 Digital, 4-21
Liability, 1-2 Overspeeds, 2-2

11-66 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

P R
Rated data
Packing list, 1-1
200 % overcurrent, 3-4
Parameter Cable cross-sections, 3-6
Fuses, 3-6
Change, 7-10
Mains filter, 3-7
Copy parameter sets. See Parameter set transfer Types 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Keypad, 7-7 Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5
Load parameter set, 7-12 Rated motor power, 11-20
Parameter classes, 7-2
Rated motor voltage, 11-22
Parameter set transfer, 7-14
Reset, Fault message, 9-9
PC program, 7-1
Setting, 7-7 Residual hazards, 2-2
Structure of a parameter set, 7-2 Residual-current circuit breaker, 4-9
Ways of parameter setting, 7-1
Resolver connection, 4-31
Parameter set transfer, 2-2 Resolver poling, 5-5

Parameter setting, 7-1 Rotor position adjustment, 5-5

PC program, 7-1
S
Global-Drive-Control, 11-1
Safety information, 2-1
Power connections, 4-13
for drive inverters in accordance with the Low-Voltage Directive,
Max. permissible cross-sections 2-1
for mains connection, 4-13 Layout, 2-2
for motor connection, 4-17 Other notes, 2-2
Warning of damage to material, 2-2
Process controller adaptation, 11-28 Warning of damage to persons, 2-2

Selection lists, Signal links, 11-51


Process input words, 11-42
Selection motor type, 11-20
Process output words, 11-42
Selection of the feedback system, 11-18
Protection against contact, 4-10 Servo. See Controller

Protection against inverse polarity, 4-20 Shielding


Control cable, 4-20
Protection of devices, 2-2 EMC, 4-34
Current derating, 6-3 Motor cable, 4-15

Speed control, 11-2, 11-5, 11-7, 11-10, 11-12


Protection of persons, 2-2, 4-9
State bus, 4-25
Insulation, 4-10
Residual-current circuit breaker, 4-9 Status indications
Global-Drive-Control, 6-1
Punching, 4-3 Keypad, 6-1

Status messages, 9-1


Status word, 9-2, 11-24
Q
Switching on the motor side, 4-17
QSP deceleration time, 11-23 Synchronous motors, Rotor position adjustment, 5-5

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-67


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

T U
Technical data, 3-1 Use, as directed, 1-2
Dimensions, 3-7
User menu, 7-9
Electrical data, 3-3
Features, 3-1
General data/application conditions, 3-2 V
Temperature monitoring, 4-28 Vibrations, 4-1
Thermal separation , 4-3 Voltage drop, 4-14
Tightening torques
Vpi current controller, 11-20
Control terminals, 4-20
Power terminals, 4-13, 4-17 Vpn speed controller, 11-20
Tni current controller, 11-20
Tnn speed controller, 11-20 W
Transport, storage, 2-1 Warning, 8-15
TRIP, 8-15 Warranty, 1-2
Troubleshooting, 9-1 Waste disposal, 1-2

11-68 BA9300SU EN 2.1 


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

 BA9300SU EN 2.1 11-69


Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix

11-70 BA9300SU EN 2.1 

You might also like